ST72C171 [STMICROELECTRONICS]

8-BIT MCU with 8K FLASH, ADC, WDG, SPI, SCI, TIMERS SPGAs Software Programmable Gain Amplifiers, OP-AMP; 8位MCU具有8K闪存, ADC , WDG , SPI , SCI ,定时器SPGAs软件可编程增益放大器,OP -AMP
ST72C171
型号: ST72C171
厂家: ST    ST
描述:

8-BIT MCU with 8K FLASH, ADC, WDG, SPI, SCI, TIMERS SPGAs Software Programmable Gain Amplifiers, OP-AMP
8位MCU具有8K闪存, ADC , WDG , SPI , SCI ,定时器SPGAs软件可编程增益放大器,OP -AMP

闪存 放大器
文件: 总152页 (文件大小:1379K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
ST72C171  
8-BIT MCU with 8K FLASH, ADC, WDG, SPI, SCI, TIMERS  
SPGAs (Software Programmable Gain Amplifiers), OP-AMP  
PRODUCT PREVIEW  
Memories  
– 8K of single voltage Flash Program memory  
with read-out protection  
– In-Situ Programming (Remote ISP)  
Clock, Reset and Supply Management  
– Enhanced Reset System  
– Low voltage supervisor (LVD) with 3 program-  
mable levels  
SO34  
– Low consumption resonator or RC oscillators  
(internal or external) and by-pass for external  
clock source, with safe control capabilities  
– 3 Power Saving modes  
22 I/O Ports  
– 22 multifunctional bidirectional I/O lines:  
– 16 interrupt inputs on 2 independent lines  
– 8 lines configurable as analog inputs  
– 20 alternate functions  
PSDIP32  
3 Analog peripherals  
– 2 Software Programmable Gain Operational  
Amplifiers (SPGAs) with rail-to-rail input and  
– EMI filtering  
2 Timers and Watchdog  
output, V  
independent (band gap) and pro-  
DD  
grammable reference voltage (1/8 V  
reso-  
DD  
– One 16-bit Timer with: 2 Input Captures, 2  
Output Compares, external Clock input, PWM  
and Pulse Generator modes  
– One 8-bit Autoreload Timer (ART) with: 2  
PWM output channels (internally connectable  
to the SPGA inputs), 1 Input Capture, external  
clock input  
lution), Offset compensation, DAC & on/off  
switching capability  
– 1 rail-to-rail input and output Op-Amp  
– 8-bit A/D Converter with up to 11 channels (in-  
cluding 3 internal channels connected to the  
Op-Amp & SPGA outputs)  
Instruction Set  
– Configurable watchdog (WDG)  
2 Communications Interfaces  
– 8-bit data manipulation  
– 63 basic Instructions  
– 17 main addressing modes  
– 8 x 8 unsigned multiply instruction  
– True bit manipulation  
– Synchronous Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI)  
– Serial Communications Interface (SCI)  
Development Tools  
– Full hardware/software development package  
Device Summary  
Features  
Flash - bytes  
ST72C171K2M  
ST72C171K2B  
8K Single Voltage  
256 (128)  
RAM (stack) - bytes  
2 SPGAs, 1 Op-Amp,  
2 SPGAs,  
Peripherals  
Watchdog, 3 Timers, SPI, SCI, ADC (11 chan.) Watchdog, 3 Timers, SPI, SCI, ADC (11 chan.)  
Operating Supply  
CPU Frequency  
Temperature Range  
Package  
3.2 V to 5.5 V  
Up to 8 MHz (with up to 16 MHz oscillator)  
- 40°C to + 85°C  
SO34  
PSDIP32  
Rev. 1.4  
1/152  
October 2000  
This is preliminary information on a new product in development or undergoing evaluation. Details are subject to change without notice.  
1
Table of Contents  
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
1.2 PIN DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
1.3 MEMORY MAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
2 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.2 MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.3 STRUCTURAL ORGANISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.4 IN-SITU PROGRAMMING (ISP) MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
2.5 MEMORY READ-OUT PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
3 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
3.2 MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
3.3 CPU REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
4 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
4.1 MAIN FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
4.2 LOW VOLTAGE DETECTOR (LVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
4.3 CLOCK SECURITY SYSTEM (CSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
4.4 CLOCK, RESET AND SUPPLY REGISTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
5 INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 24  
5.1 NON MASKABLE SOFTWARE INTERRUPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
5.2 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
5.3 PERIPHERAL INTERRUPTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
6 POWER SAVING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
6.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
6.2 SLOW MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
6.3 WAIT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
6.4 HALT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
7 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
7.1 I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
7.2 MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36  
7.3 OP-AMP MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
7.4 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
7.5 16-BIT TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
7.6 PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (ART) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
7.7 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
7.8 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
7.9 8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
8 INSTRUCTION SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
8.1 ST7 ADDRESSING MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
8.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
2/152  
1
Table of Contents  
9 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
9.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112  
9.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
9.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
9.4 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
9.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
9.6 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
9.7 EMC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
9.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
9.9 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132  
9.10 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
9.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
9.12 8-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
9.13 OP-AMP MODULE CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141  
10 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
10.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144  
10.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
10.3 SOLDERING AND GLUEABILITY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
10.4 PACKAGE/SOCKET FOOTPRINT PROPOSAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146  
11 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
11.1 OPTION BYTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147  
11.2 DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148  
11.3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149  
11.4 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
11.5 TO GET MORE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150  
12 SUMMARY OF CHANGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151  
3/152  
ST72C171  
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
1.1 INTRODUCTION  
The ST72C171 is a member of the ST7 family of  
Microcontrollers. All devices are based on a com-  
mon industry-standard 8-bit core, featuring an en-  
hanced instruction set.  
signed multiplication and indirect addressing  
modes The device includes a low consumption  
and fast start on-chip oscillator, CPU, Flash pro-  
gram memory, RAM, 22 I/O lines and the following  
on-chip peripherals: Analog-to-Digital converter  
(ADC) with 8 multiplexed analog inputs, Op-Amp  
module, synchronous SPI serial interface, asyn-  
cronous serial interface (SCI), Watchdog timer, a  
16-bit Timer featuring external Clock Input, Pulse  
Generator capabilities, 2 Input Captures and 2  
Output Compares, an 8-bit Timer featuring exter-  
nal Clock Input, Pulse Generator Capabilities (2  
channels), Autoreload and Input Capture.  
The ST72C171 features single-voltage FLASH  
memory with byte-by-byte In-Situ Programming  
(ISP) capability.  
Under software control, the device can be placed  
in WAIT, SLOW, or HALT mode, reducing power  
consumption when the application is in idle or  
standby state.  
The enhanced instruction set and addressing  
modes of the ST7 offer both power and flexibility to  
software developers, enabling the design of highly  
efficient and compact application code. In addition  
to standard 8-bit data management, all ST7 micro-  
controllers feature true bit manipulation, 8x8 un-  
The Op-Amp module adds on-chip analog fea-  
tures to the MCU, that usually require using exter-  
nal components.  
Figure 1. ST72C171 Block Diagram  
Internal  
CLOCK  
MULTIOSC  
+
OSCIN  
PORT A  
OSCOUT  
CLOCK FILTER  
PWM/ART TIMER  
PA[7:0]  
V
DD  
POWER  
16-BIT TIMER  
LVD  
SUPPLY  
V
SS  
8-BIT ADC  
CONTROL  
RESET  
OA3PIN*  
OP-AMP  
OA1OUT  
OA2OUT  
OA3OUT*  
8-BIT CORE  
ALU  
V
DDA  
PC[5:0]  
V
SSA  
PORT C  
SCI  
8K FLASH  
MEMORY  
PORT B  
PB[7:0]  
SPI  
256b-RAM  
WATCHDOG  
*only on 34-pin devices  
4/152  
ST72C171  
1.2 PIN DESCRIPTION  
Figure 2. 34-Pin SO Package Pinout  
OA2OUT  
PWM1R / OA2PIN / PC1  
OA2NIN / PC0  
OA3PIN  
PC2 / OA1PIN / PWM0R  
PC3 / OA1NIN  
OA1OUT  
1
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
3
PC4 / MCO/ OA3NIN  
VDDA  
4
TDO / PB7  
5
RDI / PB6  
VSSA  
6
ISPDATA / MISO / PB5  
MOSI / (HS) PB4  
ISPCLK / SCK / (HS) PB3  
SS / (HS) PB2  
ARTCLK / (HS) PB1  
EXTCLK / (HS) PB0  
VDD  
OA3OUT  
7
PC5/ PWM0  
8
ei1  
PA7 / AIN7 / PWM1  
PA6 / AIN6 / ARTICP0  
PA5 / AIN5  
9
10  
11  
12  
PA4 / AIN4 / OCMP1  
PA3 / AIN3 / OCMP2  
PA2 / AIN2 / ICAP1  
PA1 / AIN1 / ICAP2  
PA0 / AIN0  
ei0  
13  
14  
VSS  
OSC2  
15  
16  
17  
OSC1  
ISPSEL  
RESET  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
Figure 3. 32-Pin SDIP Package Pinout  
OA2OUT  
PWM1R / OA2PIN / PC1  
OA2NIN / PC0  
TDO / PB7  
1
32  
PC2 / OA1PIN / PWM0R  
PC3 / OA1NIN  
OA1OUT  
2
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
3
4
PC4 / MCO  
VDDA  
RDI / PB6  
5
ISPDATA / MISO / PB5  
MOSI / (HS) PB4  
ISPCLK / SCK/ (HS) PB3  
SS / (HS) PB2  
ARTCLK / (HS) PB1  
EXTCLK / (HS) PB0  
VDD  
6
VSSA  
7
PC5 / PWM0  
ei1  
8
PA7 / AIN7 / PWM1  
9
PA6 / AIN6 /ARTICP0  
PA5 / AIN5  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
PA4 / AIN4 / OCMP1  
PA3 / AIN3 / OCMP2  
PA2 / AIN2 / ICAP1  
PA1 / AIN1 / ICAP2  
PA0 / AIN0  
ei0  
VSS  
OSC2  
OSC1  
ISPSEL  
RESET  
(HS) 20mA high sink capability  
5/152  
ST72C171  
PIN DESCRIPTION (Cont’d)  
Legend / Abbreviations:  
Type:  
I = input, O = output, S = supply  
In/Output level: C = CMOS 0.3V /0.7V  
,
DD  
DD  
C = CMOS Levels with resistive output (1K)  
R
A = Analog levels  
Output level:  
HS = high sink (on N-buffer only),  
Port configuration capabilities:  
– Input:float = floating, wpu = weak pull-up, int = interrupt, ana = analog  
– Output: OD = open drain, T = true open drain, PP = push-pull  
Note: the Reset configuration of each pin is shown in bold.  
Table 1. Device Pin Description  
Pin  
Level  
Port  
Main  
function  
(after  
n°  
Pin Name  
Alternate function  
Input  
Output  
reset)  
1
1
2
OA2OUT  
O
A
OA2 output  
Port C1  
PC1/OA2PIN/  
PWM1R  
OA2 noninverting input and/or  
ART PWM1 resistive output  
2
I/O  
C
C/C  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R
3
-
3
4
5
6
PC0/OA2NIN  
OA3PIN  
I/O C/A  
C
Port C0  
OA2 inverting input  
OA3 noninverting input  
SCI transmit  
I
A
4
5
PB7/TDO  
PB6/RDI  
I/O  
I/O  
C
X
X
ei1  
ei1  
X
X
X
X
Port B7  
Port B6  
C
SCI receive  
SPI data master in/slave out or  
In Situ Programming Data In-  
put  
6
7
PB5/MISO/ISPDATA I/O  
C
X
ei1  
X
X
Port B5  
7
8
8
9
PB4/MOSI  
I/O  
I/O  
C
C
HS  
X
X
ei1  
ei1  
X
X
X
X
Port B4  
Port B3  
SPI data master out/slave in  
SPI Clock or In Situ Program-  
ming Clock Output  
PB3/SCK/ISPCLK  
HS  
9 10 PB2/SS  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
S
C
C
C
HS  
HS  
HS  
X
X
X
ei1  
ei1  
ei1  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port B2  
Port B1  
Port B0  
SPI Slave Select (active low)  
ART External Clock  
10 11 PB1/ARTCLK  
11 12 PB0/EXTCLK  
Timer16 External Clock  
12 13 V  
13 14 V  
Digital Main Supply Voltage  
Digital ground voltage  
DD  
SS  
S
Resonator oscillator inverter output or capaci-  
tor input for RC oscillator  
14 15 OSC2  
15 16 OSC1  
16 17 ISPSEL  
External clock input or Resonator oscillator in-  
verter input or resistor input for RC oscillator  
In Situ Programming Mode Select  
I
C
Must be tied to V in user mode  
SS  
17 18 RESET  
I/O  
I/O  
C
C
X
X
X
External Reset  
18 19 PA0/AIN0  
X
X
ei0  
X
X
X
X
Port A0  
ADC input 0  
ADC input 1 orTimer16 input  
capture 2  
19 20 PA1/AIN1/ICAP2  
I/O  
C
ei0  
X
Port A1  
6/152  
ST72C171  
Pin  
n°  
Level  
Port  
Main  
function  
(after  
Pin Name  
Alternate function  
Input  
Output  
reset)  
ADC input 2  
or Timer16 input capture 1  
20 21 PA2/AIN2/ICAP1  
21 22 PA3/AIN3/OCMP2  
I/O  
I/O  
C
C
X
X
ei0  
ei0  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port A2  
ADC input 3 or Timer16 output  
compare 2  
Port A3  
ADC input 4 or Timer16 output  
compare 1  
22 23 PA4 /AIN4/OCMP1  
23 24 PA5/AIN5  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
C
C
C
X
X
X
ei0  
ei0  
ei0  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port A4  
Port A5  
Port A6  
ADC input 5  
ADC input 6 or ART input cap-  
ture  
24 25 PA6/AIN6/ARTICP0  
ADC input 7 or ART PWM1  
output  
25 26 PA7/AIN7/PWM1  
I/O  
C
X
X
ei0  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Port A7  
26 27 PC5 /PWM0  
- 28 OA3OUT  
I/O  
O
C
A
Port C5  
ART PWM0 output  
OA3 output  
Analog ground  
Analog supply  
27 29 V  
28 30 V  
SSA  
DDA  
Main Clock Out or OA3 invert-  
ing input  
29 31 PC4/MCO/OA3NIN  
I/O  
O
C
A
X
X
X
X
Port C4  
30 32 OA1OUT  
OA1 output  
Port C3  
31 33 PC3/OA1NIN  
I/O C/A  
C
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
OA1 inverting input  
PC2/OA1PIN/  
32 34  
OA1 non-inverting input and/  
or ART PWM0 resistive output  
I/O C/A C/C  
Port C2  
R
PWM0R  
Notes:  
1. In the interrupt input column, “eix” defines the associated external interrupt vector. If the weak pull-up  
column (wpu) is associated with the interrupt column (int), then the I/O configuration is pull-up interrupt  
input, else the configuration is floating interrupt input.  
2. OSC1 and OSC2 pins connect a crystal or ceramic resonator, an external RC, or an external source to  
the on-chip oscillator see dedicated See “PIN DESCRIPTION” on page 5. for more details.  
7/152  
ST72C171  
1.3 MEMORY MAP  
1.3.1 Introduction  
Figure 4. Program Memory Map  
0000h  
HW Registers  
0080h  
Short Addressing  
(see Table 1.3.2)  
RAM  
Zero page  
(128 Bytes)  
007Fh  
0080h  
00FFh  
0100h  
256 bytes RAM  
Stack  
017Fh  
0180h  
(128 Bytes)  
Reserved  
017Fh  
DFFFh  
E000h  
8 Kbytes  
FLASH  
FFDFh  
FFE0h  
Interrupt & Reset Vectors  
(see Table 4)  
FFFFh  
8/152  
ST72C171  
1.3.2 Data Register  
Table 2. Hardware Register Memory Map  
Block  
Name  
Register  
Label  
Reset  
Address  
Register name  
Remarks  
Status  
0000h  
0001h  
0002h  
0003h  
PADR  
Data Register  
00h  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
PADDR  
PAOR  
Data Direction Register  
Option Register  
Not Used  
Port A  
Absent  
0004h  
0005h  
0006h  
0007h  
PBDR  
PBDDR  
PBOR  
Data Register  
00h  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Data Direction Register  
Option Register  
Not Used  
Port B  
Port C  
Absent  
0008h  
0009h  
000Ah  
PCDR  
PCDDR  
PCOR  
Data Register  
00h  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Data Direction Register  
Option Register  
000Bh to  
001Ah  
Reserved Area (16 Bytes)  
001Bh  
001Ch  
001Dh  
001Eh  
001Fh  
OA1CR  
OA1 Control Register  
OA2 Control Register  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
OA2CR  
OA3CR  
OAIRR  
OPAMP  
OA3 Control Register  
OA Interrupt & Readout Register  
OA Voltage Reference Control Register  
R/W  
Section 7.3  
R/W  
OAVRCR  
0020h  
MISC1  
SPI  
MISCR1  
Miscellaneous Register 1  
00h  
see Section 4.3.5  
0021h  
0022h  
0023h  
SPIDR  
SPICR  
SPISR  
Data I/O Register  
Control Register  
Status Register  
xxh  
0xh  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
Read Only  
0024h  
WDG  
CRS  
WDGCR  
Watchdog Control register  
7Fh  
R/W  
Clock, Reset and Supply Control / Status  
Register  
0025h  
CRSR  
00h  
R/W  
0026h to  
0030h  
Reserved Area (11 Bytes)  
0031h  
TACR2  
TACR1  
Control Register2  
Control Register1  
00h  
00h  
xxh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
FFh  
FCh  
FFh  
FCh  
xxh  
xxh  
80h  
00h  
R/W  
R/W  
0032h  
0033h  
0034h-  
0035h  
0036h-  
0037h  
0038h-  
0039h  
003Ah-  
003Bh  
003Ch-  
003Dh  
003Eh-  
003Fh  
TASR  
Status Register  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
TAIC1HR  
TAIC1LR  
TAOC1HR  
TAOC1LR  
TACHR  
Input Capture1 High Register  
Input Capture1 Low Register  
Output Compare1 High Register  
Output Compare1 Low Register  
Counter High Register  
R/W  
TIMER16  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
Read Only  
R/W  
TACLR  
Counter Low Register  
TAACHR  
TAACLR  
TAIC2HR  
TAIC2LR  
TAOC2HR  
TAOC2LR  
Alternate Counter High Register  
Alternate Counter Low Register  
Input Capture2 High Register  
Input Capture2 Low Register  
Output Compare2 High Register  
Output Compare2 Low Register  
R/W  
0040h  
MISC2  
MISCR2  
Miscellaneous Register2  
00h  
see Section 7.2.2  
9/152  
ST72C171  
Block  
Name  
Register  
Label  
Reset  
Status  
Address  
Register name  
Remarks  
0041h to  
004Fh  
Reserved Area (15 Bytes)  
0050h  
0051h  
0052h  
0053h  
0054h  
SCISR  
SCIDR  
Status Register  
Data Register  
0C0h  
0xxh  
0Xxh  
0xxh  
00h  
Read Only  
R/W  
SCI  
SCIBRR  
SCICR1  
SCICR2  
Baud Rate Register  
Control Register 1  
Control Register 2  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0055h to  
006Fh  
Reserved Area (27 Bytes)  
0070h  
0071h  
ADCDR  
Data Register  
00h  
00h  
Read Only  
R/W  
ADC  
ADCCSR  
Control/Status Register  
0072h  
0073h  
Reserved Area (2 Bytes)  
0074h  
0075h  
0076h  
0077h  
0078h  
0079h  
007Ah  
007Bh  
PWMDCR1  
PWMDCR0  
PWMCR  
ARTCSR  
ARTCAR  
ARTARR  
ARTICCSR  
ARTICR1  
PWM Duty Cycle Register 1  
PWM Duty Cycle Register 0  
PWM Control Register  
Control/Status Register  
Counter Access Register  
Auto Reload Register  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
00h  
ART/PWM  
R/W  
R/W  
Input Capture Control Status Register  
Input Capture Register 1  
Read Only  
007Ch to  
007Fh  
Reserved Area (4 Bytes)  
10/152  
ST72C171  
2 FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY  
2.1 INTRODUCTION  
This mode needs five signals (plus the V signal  
if necessary) to be connected to the programming  
tool. This signals are:  
DD  
FLASH devices have a single voltage non-volatile  
FLASH memory that may be programmed in-situ  
(or plugged in a programming tool) on a byte-by-  
byte basis.  
– RESET: device reset  
– V : device ground power supply  
SS  
– ISPCLK: ISP output serial clock pin  
– ISPDATA: ISP input serial data pin  
2.2 MAIN FEATURES  
– ISPSEL: Remote ISP mode selection. This pin  
must be connected to V on the application  
Remote In-Situ Programming (ISP) mode  
Up to 16 bytes programmed in the same cycle  
MTP memory (Multiple Time Programmable)  
Read-out memory protection against piracy  
SS  
board through a pull-down resistor.  
If any of these pins are used for other purposes on  
the application, a serial resistor has to be imple-  
mented to avoid a conflict if the other device forces  
the signal level.  
2.3 STRUCTURAL ORGANISATION  
Figure 1 shows a typical hardware interface to a  
standard ST7 programming tool. For more details  
on the pin locations, refer to the device pinout de-  
scription.  
The FLASH program memory is organised in a  
single 8-bit wide memory block which can be used  
for storing both code and data constants.  
Figure 5. Typical Remote ISP Interface  
The FLASH program memory is mapped in the up-  
per part of the ST7 addressing space and includes  
the reset and interrupt user vector area .  
HE10 CONNECTOR TYPE  
TO PROGRAMMING TOOL  
XTAL  
2.4 IN-SITU PROGRAMMING (ISP) MODE  
1
C
C
L1  
L0  
The FLASH program memory can be programmed  
using Remote ISP mode. This ISP mode allows  
the contents of the ST7 program memory to be up-  
dated using a standard ST7 programming tools af-  
ter the device is mounted on the application board.  
This feature can be implemented with a minimum  
number of added components and board area im-  
pact.  
ISPSEL  
10KΩ  
V
SS  
RESET  
ISPCLK  
An example Remote ISP hardware interface to the  
standard ST7 programming tool is described be-  
low. For more details on ISP programming, refer to  
the ST7 Programming Specification.  
ST7  
ISPDATA  
47KΩ  
Remote ISP Overview  
The Remote ISP mode is initiated by a specific se-  
quence on the dedicated ISPSEL pin.  
APPLICATION  
The Remote ISP is performed in three steps:  
– Selection of the RAM execution mode  
– Download of Remote ISP code in RAM  
2.5 MEMORY READ-OUT PROTECTION  
The read-out protection is enabled through an op-  
tion bit.  
– Execution of Remote ISP code in RAM to pro-  
gram the user program into the FLASH  
For FLASH devices, when this option is selected,  
the program and data stored in the FLASH memo-  
ry are protected against read-out piracy (including  
a re-write protection). When this protection option  
is removed the entire FLASH program memory is  
first automatically erased. However, the E PROM  
data memory (when available) can be protected  
only with ROM devices.  
Remote ISP hardware configuration  
In Remote ISP mode, the ST7 has to be supplied  
2
with power (V  
cillator and application crystal circuit for example).  
and V ) and a clock signal (os-  
DD  
SS  
11/152  
ST72C171  
3 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT  
3.1 INTRODUCTION  
Accumulator (A)  
The Accumulator is an 8-bit general purpose reg-  
ister used to hold operands and the results of the  
arithmetic and logic calculations and to manipulate  
data.  
This CPU has a full 8-bit architecture and contains  
six internal registers allowing efficient 8-bit data  
manipulation.  
Index Registers (X and Y)  
3.2 MAIN FEATURES  
In indexed addressing modes, these 8-bit registers  
are used to create either effective addresses or  
temporary storage areas for data manipulation.  
(The Cross-Assembler generates a precede in-  
struction (PRE) to indicate that the following in-  
struction refers to the Y register.)  
63 basic instructions  
Fast 8-bit by 8-bit multiply  
17 main addressing modes  
Two 8-bit index registers  
16-bit stack pointer  
The Y register is not affected by the interrupt auto-  
matic procedures (not pushed to and popped from  
the stack).  
Low power modes  
Maskable hardware interrupts  
Non-maskable software interrupt  
Program Counter (PC)  
The program counter is a 16-bit register containing  
the address of the next instruction to be executed  
by the CPU. It is made of two 8-bit registers PCL  
(Program Counter Low which is the LSB) and PCH  
(Program Counter High which is the MSB).  
3.3 CPU REGISTERS  
The 6 CPU registers shown in Figure 1 are not  
present in the memory mapping and are accessed  
by specific instructions.  
Figure 6. CPU Registers  
7
0
ACCUMULATOR  
RESET VALUE = XXh  
7
0
0
X INDEX REGISTER  
Y INDEX REGISTER  
RESET VALUE = XXh  
7
RESET VALUE = XXh  
PCL  
PCH  
7
8
15  
0
PROGRAM COUNTER  
RESET VALUE = RESET VECTOR @ FFFEh-FFFFh  
7
1
0
1
1
1
1
H I N Z  
C
CONDITION CODE REGISTER  
RESET VALUE =  
8
1
X 1 X X X  
0
15  
7
STACK POINTER  
RESET VALUE = STACK HIGHER ADDRESS  
X = Undefined Value  
12/152  
ST72C171  
CPU REGISTERS (Cont’d)  
CONDITION CODE REGISTER (CC)  
Read/Write  
because the I bit is set by hardware at the start of  
the routine and reset by the IRET instruction at the  
end of the routine. If the I bit is cleared by software  
in the interrupt routine, pending interrupts are  
serviced regardless of the priority level of the cur-  
rent interrupt routine.  
Reset Value: 111x1xxx  
7
0
1
1
1
H
I
N
Z
C
Bit 2 = N Negative.  
The 8-bit Condition Code register contains the in-  
terrupt mask and four flags representative of the  
result of the instruction just executed. This register  
can also be handled by the PUSH and POP in-  
structions.  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. It is repre-  
sentative of the result sign of the last arithmetic,  
logical or data manipulation. It is a copy of the 7  
th  
bit of the result.  
0: The result of the last operation is positive or null.  
1: The result of the last operation is negative  
(i.e. the most significant bit is a logic 1).  
These bits can be individually tested and/or con-  
trolled by specific instructions.  
This bit is accessed by the JRMI and JRPL instruc-  
tions.  
Bit 4 = H Half carry.  
This bit is set by hardware when a carry occurs be-  
tween bits 3 and 4 of the ALU during an ADD or  
ADC instruction. It is reset by hardware during the  
same instructions.  
0: No half carry has occurred.  
1: A half carry has occurred.  
Bit 1 = Z Zero.  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware. This bit in-  
dicates that the result of the last arithmetic, logical  
or data manipulation is zero.  
0: The result of the last operation is different from  
zero.  
This bit is tested using the JRH or JRNH instruc-  
tion. The H bit is useful in BCD arithmetic subrou-  
tines.  
1: The result of the last operation is zero.  
This bit is accessed by the JREQ and JRNE test  
instructions.  
Bit 3 = I Interrupt mask.  
This bit is set by hardware when entering in inter-  
rupt or by software to disable all interrupts except  
the TRAP software interrupt. This bit is cleared by  
software.  
0: Interrupts are enabled.  
1: Interrupts are disabled.  
Bit 0 = C Carry/borrow.  
This bit is set and cleared by hardware and soft-  
ware. It indicates an overflow or an underflow has  
occurred during the last arithmetic operation.  
0: No overflow or underflow has occurred.  
1: An overflow or underflow has occurred.  
This bit is controlled by the RIM, SIM and IRET in-  
structions and is tested by the JRM and JRNM in-  
structions.  
This bit is driven by the SCF and RCF instructions  
and tested by the JRC and JRNC instructions. It is  
also affected by the “bit test and branch”, shift and  
rotate instructions.  
Note: Interrupts requested while I is set are  
latched and can be processed when I is cleared.  
By default an interrupt routine is not interruptable  
13/152  
ST72C171  
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT (Cont’d)  
Stack Pointer (SP)  
The least significant byte of the Stack Pointer  
(called S) can be directly accessed by a LD in-  
struction.  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 01 7Fh  
Note: When the lower limit is exceeded, the Stack  
Pointer wraps around to the stack upper limit, with-  
out indicating the stack overflow. The previously  
stored information is then overwritten and there-  
fore lost. The stack also wraps in case of an under-  
flow.  
15  
8
1
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The stack is used to save the return address dur-  
ing a subroutine call and the CPU context during  
an interrupt. The user may also directly manipulate  
the stack by means of the PUSH and POP instruc-  
tions. In the case of an interrupt, the PCL is stored  
at the first location pointed to by the SP. Then the  
other registers are stored in the next locations as  
shown in Figure 7.  
1
SP5  
SP4  
SP3  
SP2  
SP1  
SP0  
The Stack Pointer is a 16-bit register which is al-  
ways pointing to the next free location in the stack.  
It is then decremented after data has been pushed  
onto the stack and incremented before data is  
popped from the stack (see Figure 7).  
– When an interrupt is received, the SP is decre-  
mented and the context is pushed on the stack.  
Since the stack is 128 bytes deep, the 10 most sig-  
nificant bits are forced by hardware. Following an  
MCU Reset, or after a Reset Stack Pointer instruc-  
tion (RSP), the Stack Pointer contains its reset val-  
ue (the SP5 to SP0 bits are set) which is the stack  
higher address.  
– On return from interrupt, the SP is incremented  
and the context is popped from the stack.  
A subroutine call occupies two locations and an in-  
terrupt five locations in the stack area.  
Figure 7. Stack Manipulation Example  
CALL  
Subroutine  
RET  
or RSP  
PUSH Y  
POP Y  
IRET  
Interrupt  
Event  
@ 0100h  
SP  
SP  
SP  
Y
CC  
A
CC  
A
CC  
A
X
X
X
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
SP  
SP  
PCH  
PCL  
PCH  
PCL  
SP  
@ 017Fh  
Stack Higher Address = 017Fh  
0100h  
Stack Lower Address =  
14/152  
ST72C171  
– Global power down  
4 SUPPLY, RESET AND CLOCK  
MANAGEMENT  
Reset Sequence Manager (RSM)  
Multi-Oscillator (MO)  
The device includes a range of utility features for  
securing the application in critical situations (for  
example in case of a power brown-out), and re-  
ducing the number of external components. An  
overview is shown in Figure 8.  
– 4 Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators  
– 2 External RC oscillators  
– 1 Internal RC oscillator  
Clock Security System (CSS)  
– Clock Filter  
4.1 Main Features  
– Backup Safe Oscillator  
Supply Manager  
Main Clock controller (MCC)  
– Main supply Low voltage detection (LVD)  
Figure 8. Clock, Reset and Supply Block Diagram  
MCO  
f
CPU  
CLOCK SECURITY SYSTEM  
(CSS)  
MULTI-  
OSCILLATOR  
(MO)  
MAIN CLOCK  
CONTROLLER  
(MCC)  
f
OSCOUT  
OSCIN  
OSC  
CLOCK  
FILTER  
SAFE  
OSC  
RESET SEQUENCE  
MANAGER  
FROM  
WATCHDOG  
PERIPHERAL  
RESET  
(RSM)  
-
LVD  
CSS  
WDG  
V
DD  
LOW VOLTAGE  
DETECTOR  
(LVD)  
-
-
-
RF  
0
IE SOD RF  
V
SS  
CRSR  
CF INTERRUPT  
15/152  
ST72C171  
4.2 LOW VOLTAGE DETECTOR (LVD)  
To allow the integration of power management  
features in the application, the Low Voltage Detec-  
tor function (LVD) generates a static reset when  
In these conditions, secure operation is always en-  
sured for the application without the need for ex-  
ternal reset hardware.  
the V  
supply voltage is below a V reference  
DD  
IT-  
During a Low Voltage Detector Reset, the RESET  
pin is held low, thus permitting the MCU to reset  
other devices.  
value. This means that it secures the power-up as  
well as the power-down keeping the ST7 in reset.  
The V reference value for a voltage drop is lower  
IT-  
Notes:  
than the V reference value for power-on in order  
1. The LVD allows the device to be used without  
any external RESET circuitry.  
IT+  
to avoid a parasitic reset when the MCU starts run-  
ning and sinks current on the supply (hysteresis).  
2. Three different reference levels are selectable  
through the option byte according to the applica-  
tion requirement.  
The LVD Reset circuitry generates a reset when  
V
is below:  
DD  
LVD application note  
– V when V is rising  
IT+  
DD  
– V when V is falling  
The LVD function is illustrated in the Figure .  
Application software can detect a reset caused by  
the LVD by reading the LVDRF bit in the CRSR  
register.  
IT-  
DD  
Provided the minimum V value (guaranteed for  
DD  
This bit is set by hardware when a LVD reset is  
generated and cleared by software (writing zero).  
the oscillator frequency) is above V , the MCU  
IT-  
can only be in two modes:  
– under full software control  
– in static safe reset  
Figure 9. Low Voltage Detector vs Reset  
V
DD  
V
hyst  
V
V
IT+  
IT-  
RESET  
16/152  
ST72C171  
4.2.1 Reset Sequence Manager (RSM)  
The RSM block of the CROSS Module includes  
three RESET sources as shown in Figure 10:  
These sources act on the RESET PIN and it is al-  
ways kept low during the READ OPTION RESET  
phase.  
EXTERNAL RESET SOURCE pulse  
Internal LVD RESET (Low Voltage Detection)  
Internal WATCHDOG RESET  
The RESET service routine vector is fixed at the  
FFFEh-FFFFh addresses in the ST7 memory  
map.  
Figure 10. Reset Block Diagram  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
V
DD  
f
CPU  
R
ON  
RESET  
WATCHDOG RESET  
READ OPTION RESET  
LVD RESET  
The basic RESET sequence consists of 4 phases  
as shown in Figure 11:  
OPTION BYTE reading to configure the device  
Delay depending on the RESET source  
4096 cpu clock cycle delay  
The duration of the OPTION BYTE reading phase  
(t  
) is defined in the Electrical Characteristics  
ROB  
section. This first phase is initiated by an external  
RESET pin pulse detection, a Watchdog RESET  
detection, or when V rises up to V  
.
LVDopt  
DD  
The 4096 cpu clock cycle delay allows the oscilla-  
tor to stabilise and to ensure that recovery has tak-  
en place from the Reset state.  
RESET vector fetch  
The RESET vector fetch phase duration is 2 clock  
cycles.  
Figure 11. RESET Sequence Phases  
RESET  
READ  
INTERNAL RESET  
FETCH  
DELAY  
OPTION BYTE  
4096 CLOCK CYCLES VECTOR  
tROB  
17/152  
ST72C171  
RESET SEQUENCE MANAGER (Cont’d)  
4.2.2 Asynchronous External RESET pin  
4.2.3 Internal Low Voltage Detection RESET  
The RESET pin is both an input and an open-drain  
Two different RESET sequences caused by the in-  
ternal LVD circuitry can be distinguished:  
output with integrated R  
weak pull-up resistor.  
ON  
This pull-up has no fixed value but varies in ac-  
cordance with the input voltage. It can be pulled  
low by external circuitry to reset the device. See  
electrical characteristics section for more details.  
Power-On RESET  
Voltage Drop RESET  
The device RESET pin acts as an output that is  
pulled low when V <V  
(rising edge) or  
DD  
IT+  
A RESET signal originating from an external  
V
<V (falling edge) as shown in Figure 12.  
DD  
IT-  
source must have a duration of at least t  
in  
h(RSTL)in  
The LVD filters spikes on V larger than t  
avoid parasitic resets.  
to  
g(VDD)  
order to be recognized. This detection is asynchro-  
nous and therefore the MCU can enter reset state  
even in HALT mode.  
DD  
4.2.4 Internal Watchdog RESET  
The RESET pin is an asynchronous signal which  
plays a major role in EMS performance. In a noisy  
environment, it is recommended to follow the  
guidelines mentioned in the electrical characteris-  
tics section.  
The RESET sequence generated by a internal  
Watchdog counter overflow is shown in Figure 12.  
Starting from the Watchdog counter underflow, the  
device RESET pin acts as an output that is pulled  
low during at least t  
.
w(RSTL)out  
Two RESET sequences can be associated with  
this RESET source: short or long external reset  
pulse (see Figure 12).  
Starting from the external RESET pulse recogni-  
tion, the device RESET pin acts as an output that  
is pulled low during at least t  
.
w(RSTL)out  
Figure 12. RESET Sequences  
V
DD  
V
V
IT+  
IT-  
LVD  
RESET  
SHORT EXT.  
RESET  
LONG EXT.  
RESET  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
RUN  
DELAY  
DELAY  
DELAY  
DELAY  
t
t
w(RSTL)out  
h(RSTL)in  
t
w(RSTL)out  
t
h(RSTL)in  
EXTERNAL  
RESET  
SOURCE  
RESET PIN  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
WATCHDOG UNDERFLOW  
INTERNAL RESET (4096 TCPU  
FETCH VECTOR  
)
18/152  
ST72C171  
4.2.4.1 Multi-Oscillator (MO)  
has to drive the OSCin pin while the OSCout pin is  
tied to ground (see Figure 13).  
The Multi-Oscillator (MO) block is the main clock  
supplier of the ST7. To insure an optimum integra-  
tion in the application, it is based on an external  
clock source and six different selectable oscilla-  
tors.  
Figure 13. MO External Clock  
ST7  
OSCin  
OSCout  
The main clock of the ST7 can be generated by 8  
different sources comming from the MO block:  
an External source  
4 Crystal or Ceramic resonator oscillators  
1 External RC oscillators  
EXTERNAL  
SOURCE  
1 Internal High Frequency RC oscillator  
Crystal/Ceramic Oscillators  
Each oscillator is optimized for a given frequency  
range in term of consumption and is selectable  
through the Option Byte.  
This family of oscillators allows a high accuracy on  
the main clock of the ST7. The selection within the  
list of 4 oscillators has to be done by Option Byte  
according to the resonator frequency in order to  
reduce the consumption. In this mode of the MO  
block, the resonator and the load capacitors have  
to be connected as shown in Figure 14 and have  
to be mounted as close as possible to the oscilla-  
tor pins in order to minimize output distortion and  
start-up stabilization time.  
External Clock Source  
The default Option Byte value selects the External  
Clock in the MO block. In this mode, a clock signal  
(square, sinus or triangle) with ~50% duty cycle  
These oscillators, when selected via the Option  
Byte, are not stopped during the RESET phase to  
avoid losing time in the oscillator starting phase.  
Figure 14. MO Crystal/Ceramic Resonator  
ST7  
OSCin  
OSCout  
C
C
L1  
L0  
LOAD  
CAPACITORS  
19/152  
ST72C171  
MULTIOSCILLATOR (MO) (Cont’d)  
External RC Oscillator  
Internal RC Oscillator  
This oscillator allows a low cost solution on the  
main clock of the ST7 using only an external resis-  
tor and an external capacitor (see Figure 15). The  
selection of the external RC oscillator has to be  
done by Option Byte.  
The Internal RC oscillator mode is based on the  
same principle as the External RC one including  
the an on-chip resistor and capacitor. This mode is  
the most cost effective one with the drawback of a  
lower frequency accuracy. Its frequency is in the  
range of several MHz.  
The frequency of the external RC oscillator is fixed  
by the resistor and the capacitor values:  
In this mode, the two oscillator pins have to be tied  
to ground as shown in Figure 16.  
N
. C  
f
~
OSC  
R
The selection of the internal RC oscillator has to  
be done by Option Byte.  
EX  
EX  
The previous formula shows that in this MO mode,  
the accuracy of the clock is directly linked to the  
accuracy of the discrete components.  
Figure 16. MO Internal RC  
ST7  
Figure 15. MO External RC  
OSCin  
OSCout  
ST7  
OSCin  
OSCout  
R
C
EX  
EX  
20/152  
ST72C171  
4.3 CLOCK SECURITY SYSTEM (CSS)  
The Clock Security System (CSS) protects the  
ST7 against main clock problems. To allow the in-  
tegration of the security features in the applica-  
tions, it is based on a clock filter control and an In-  
ternal safe oscillator. The CSS can be enabled or  
disabled by option byte.  
Limitation detection  
The automatic safe oscillator selection is notified  
by hardware setting the CSSD bit of the CRSR  
register. An interrupt can be generated if the CS-  
SIE bit has been previously set.  
These two bits are described in the CRSR register  
description.  
4.3.1 Clock Filter Control  
4.3.3 Low Power Modes  
The clock filter is based on a clock frequency limi-  
tation function.  
Mode  
WAIT  
Description  
This filter function is able to detect and filter high  
frequency spikes on the ST7 main clock.  
No effect on CSS. CSS interrupt cause the  
device to exit from Wait mode.  
If the oscillator is not working properly (e.g. work-  
ing at a harmonic frequency of the resonator), the  
current active oscillator clock can be totally fil-  
tered, and then no clock signal is available for the  
ST7 from this oscillator anymore. If the original  
clock source recovers, the filtering is stopped au-  
tomatically and the oscillator supplies the ST7  
clock.  
The CRSR register is frozen. The CSS (in-  
cluding the safe oscillator) is disabled until  
HALT mode is exited. The previous CSS  
configuration resumes when the MCU is  
woken up by an interrupt with “exit from  
HALT mode” capability or from the counter  
reset value when the MCU is woken up by a  
RESET.  
HALT  
4.3.2 Safe Oscillator Control  
4.3.4 Interrupts  
The safe oscillator of the CSS block is a low fre-  
quency back-up clock source (see Figure 17).  
The CSS interrupt event generates an interrupt if  
the corresponding Enable Control Bit (CSSIE) is  
set and the interrupt mask in the CC register is re-  
set (RIM instruction).  
If the clock signal disappears (due to a broken or  
disconnected resonator...) during a safe oscillator  
period, the safe oscillator delivers a low frequency  
clock signal which allows the ST7 to perform some  
rescue operations.  
Enable Exit  
Control from  
Exit  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
from  
1)  
Bit  
Wait Halt  
Automatically, the ST7 clock source switches back  
from the safe oscillator if the original clock source  
recovers.  
CSS event detection  
(safe oscillator acti- CSSD CSSIE  
vated as main clock)  
Yes No  
Note 1: This interrupt allows to exit from active-halt  
mode if this mode is available in the MCU.  
Figure 17. Clock Filter Function and Safe Oscillator Function  
f
/2  
OSC  
f
CPU  
f
/2  
OSC  
f
SFOSC  
f
CPU  
21/152  
ST72C171  
4.3.5 Main Clock Controller (MCC)  
The MCC block supplies the clock for the ST7  
CPU and its internal peripherals. It allows the pow-  
er saving modes such as SLOW mode to be man-  
aged by the application.  
The prescaler allows the selection of the main  
clock frequency and is controlled with three bits of  
the MISCR1: CP1, CP0 and SMS.  
The clock-out capability is an Alternate Function of  
All functions are managed by the Miscellaneous  
Register 1 (MISCR1).  
an I/O port pin, providing the f  
put for driving external devices. It is controlled by  
the MCO bit in the MISCR1 register.  
clock as an out-  
CPU  
The MCC block consists of:  
– a programmable CPU clock prescaler  
– a clock-out signal to supply external devices  
Figure 18. Main Clock Controller (MCC) Block Diagram  
MULTI-  
OSCILLATOR  
(MO)  
CLOCK  
FILTER  
(CF)  
OSCIN  
f
OSC  
DIV 2  
OSCOUT  
DIV 2, 4, 8, 16  
MISCR1  
MCO  
CP1 CP0 SMS  
CPU CLOCK  
TO CPU AND  
PERIPHERALS  
f
CPU  
PORT  
ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION  
MCO  
22/152  
ST72C171  
4.4 CLOCK, RESET AND SUPPLY REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CLOCK RESET AND SUPPLY REGISTER  
(CRSR)  
Bit 1 = CSSD CSS Safe Osc. Detection  
This bit indicates that the safe oscillator of the CSS  
block has been selected. It is set by hardware and  
cleared by reading the CRSR register when the  
original oscillator recovers.  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 000x 000x (00h)  
7
0
0: Safe oscillator is not active  
1: Safe oscillator has been activated  
LVD  
RF  
CSS CSS WDG  
-
-
-
-
IE  
D
RF  
Bit 0 = WDGRF WatchDog Reset Flag  
This bit indicates when set that the last Reset was  
generated by the Watchdog peripheral. It is set by  
hardware (watchdog reset) and cleared by soft-  
ware (writing zero) or an LVD Reset.  
Combined with the LVDRF flag information, the  
flag description is given by the following table.  
Bit 7:5 = Reserved.  
Bit 4 = LVDRF LVD Reset Flag  
This bit indicates when set that the last Reset was  
generated by the LVD block. It is set by hardware  
(LVD reset) and cleared by software (writing zero)  
or a Watchdog Reset. See WDGRF flag descrip-  
tion for more details.  
RESET Sources  
External RESET pin  
Watchdog  
LVDRF WDGRF  
0
0
1
0
1
X
LVD  
Bit 3 = Reserved.  
Bit 2 = CSSIE CSS Interrupt Enable  
This bit allows to enable the interrupt when a dis-  
trurbance is detected by the Clock Security Sys-  
tem (CSSD bit set). It is set and cleared by soft-  
ware.  
0: Clock Filter interrupt disable  
1: Clock Filter interrupt enable  
Table 3. Supply, Reset and Clock Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MISCR  
Reset Value  
PEI3  
0
PEI2  
0
MCO  
0
PEI1  
0
PEI0  
0
CP1  
0
CP0  
0
SMS  
0
0020h  
0025h  
CRSR  
Reset Value  
-
0
-
0
-
0
LVDRF  
x
-
0
CSSIE  
0
CSSD  
0
WDGRF  
x
23/152  
ST72C171  
5 INTERRUPTS  
The ST7 core may be interrupted by one of two dif-  
ferent methods: maskable hardware interrupts as  
listed in the Interrupt Mapping Table and a non-  
maskable software interrupt (TRAP). The Interrupt  
processing flowchart is shown in Figure 19.  
The maskable interrupts must be enabled clearing  
the I bit in order to be serviced. However, disabled  
interrupts may be latched and processed when  
they are enabled (see external interrupts subsec-  
tion).  
It will be serviced according to the flowchart on  
Figure 19.  
5.2 EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS  
External interrupt vectors can be loaded into the  
PC register if the corresponding external interrupt  
occurred and if the I bit is cleared. These interrupts  
allow the processor to leave the Halt low power  
mode.  
When an interrupt has to be serviced:  
The external interrupt polarity is selected through  
the miscellaneous register or interrupt register (if  
available).  
– Normal processing is suspended at the end of  
the current instruction execution.  
An external interrupt triggered on edge will be  
latched and the interrupt request automatically  
cleared upon entering the interrupt service routine.  
– The PC, X, A and CC registers are saved onto  
the stack.  
– The I bit of the CC register is set to prevent addi-  
tional interrupts.  
If several input pins, connected to the same inter-  
rupt vector, are configured as interrupts, their sig-  
nals are logically ANDed before entering the edge/  
level detection block.  
– The PC is then loaded with the interrupt vector of  
the interrupt to service and the first instruction of  
the interrupt service routine is fetched (refer to  
the Interrupt Mapping Table for vector address-  
es).  
Caution: The type of sensitivity defined in the Mis-  
cellaneous or Interrupt register (if available) ap-  
plies to the ei source. In case of an ANDed source  
(as described on the I/O ports section), a low level  
on an I/O pin configured as input with interrupt,  
masks the interrupt request even in case of rising-  
edge sensitivity.  
The interrupt service routine should finish with the  
IRET instruction which causes the contents of the  
saved registers to be recovered from the stack.  
Note: As a consequence of the IRET instruction,  
the I bit will be cleared and the main program will  
resume.  
5.3 PERIPHERAL INTERRUPTS  
Priority Management  
Different peripheral interrupt flags in the status  
register are able to cause an interrupt when they  
are active if both:  
By default, a servicing interrupt cannot be inter-  
rupted because the I bit is set by hardware enter-  
ing in interrupt routine.  
– The I bit of the CC register is cleared.  
In the case when several interrupts are simultane-  
ously pending, an hardware priority defines which  
one will be serviced first (see the Interrupt Map-  
ping Table).  
– The corresponding enable bit is set in the control  
register.  
If any of these two conditions is false, the interrupt  
is latched and thus remains pending.  
Interrupts and Low Power Mode  
Clearing an interrupt request is done by:  
All interrupts allow the processor to leave the  
WAIT low power mode. Only external and specifi-  
cally mentioned interrupts allow the processor to  
leave the HALT low power mode (refer to the “Exit  
from HALT“ column in the Interrupt Mapping Ta-  
ble).  
– Writing “0” to the corresponding bit in the status  
register or  
– Access to the status register while the flag is set  
followed by a read or write of an associated reg-  
ister.  
Note: the clearing sequence resets the internal  
latch. A pending interrupt (i.e. waiting for being en-  
abled) will therefore be lost if the clear sequence is  
executed.  
5.1 NON MASKABLE SOFTWARE INTERRUPT  
This interrupt is entered when the TRAP instruc-  
tion is executed regardless of the state of the I bit.  
24/152  
ST72C171  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
Figure 19. Interrupt Processing Flowchart  
FROM RESET  
N
I BIT SET?  
Y
N
INTERRUPT  
PENDING?  
Y
FETCH NEXT INSTRUCTION  
N
IRET?  
STACK PC, X, A, CC  
SET I BIT  
Y
LOAD PC FROM INTERRUPT VECTOR  
EXECUTE INSTRUCTION  
RESTORE PC, X, A, CC FROM STACK  
THIS CLEARS I BIT BY DEFAULT  
25/152  
ST72C171  
INTERRUPTS (Cont’d)  
Table 4. Interrupt Mapping  
Source  
Register  
Label  
Exit from  
HALT  
Vector  
Address  
Priority  
Order  
Description  
Flag  
Block  
RESET  
TRAP  
ei0  
Reset  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
yes  
no  
FFFEh-FFFFh  
FFFCh-FFFDh  
FFFAh-FFFBh  
FFF8h-FFF9h  
FFF6h-FFF7h  
Highest  
Priority  
Software  
Ext. Interrupt ei0  
Ext. Interrupt ei1  
Clock Filter Interrupt  
Transfer Complete  
Mode Fault  
N/A  
N/A  
yes  
yes  
no  
ei1  
N/A  
N/A  
CSS  
CRSR  
CSSD  
SPIF  
SPI  
SPISR  
no  
FFF4h-FFF5h  
MODF  
ICF1_1  
OCF1_1  
ICF2_1  
OCF2_1  
TOF_1  
ICF0  
Input Capture 1  
Output Compare 1  
Input Capture 2  
Output Compare 2  
Timer Overflow  
Input Capture 1  
Timer Overflow  
OA1 Interrupt  
TIMER 16  
TASR  
no  
FFF2h-FFF3h  
ARTICCSR  
ARTCSR  
FFF0h-FFF1h  
FFEEh-FFEFh  
FFECh-FFEDh  
FFEAh-FFEBh  
FFE6-FFE9  
ART/PWM  
OP-AMP  
yes  
yes  
OVF  
OA1V  
OA2V  
OIRR  
OA2 Interrupt  
NOT USED  
SCI Peripheral Interrupts  
SCI  
no  
FFE4-FFE5  
Lowest  
Priority  
NOT USED  
FFE0h-FFE3h  
26/152  
ST72C171  
6.2 SLOW MODE  
6 POWER SAVING MODES  
This mode has two targets:  
6.1 INTRODUCTION  
– To reduce power consumption by decreasing the  
internal clock in the device,  
To give a large measure of flexibility to the applica-  
tion in terms of power consumption, three main  
power saving modes are implemented in the ST7  
(see Figure 20).  
– To adapt the internal clock frequency (f  
the available supply voltage.  
) to  
CPU  
SLOW mode is controlled by three bits in the  
MISCR1 register: the SMS bit which enables or  
disables Slow mode and two CPx bits which select  
After a RESET the normal operating mode is se-  
lected by default (RUN mode). This mode drives  
the device (CPU and embedded peripherals) by  
means of a master clock which is based on the  
the internal slow frequency (f  
).  
CPU  
In this mode, the oscillator frequency can be divid-  
ed by 4, 8, 16 or 32 instead of 2 in normal operat-  
ing mode. The CPU and peripherals are clocked at  
this lower frequency.  
main oscillator frequency divided by 2 (f  
).  
CPU  
From Run mode, the different power saving  
modes may be selected by setting the relevant  
register bits or by calling the specific ST7 software  
instruction whose action depends on the the oscil-  
lator status.  
Note: SLOW-WAIT mode is activated when enter-  
ring the WAIT mode while the device is already in  
SLOW mode.  
Figure 20. Power Saving Mode Transitions  
Figure 21. SLOW Mode Clock Transitions  
High  
RUN  
f
/4  
f
/8  
f
/2  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
f
CPU  
f
/2  
OSC  
SLOW  
WAIT  
00  
01  
CP1:0  
SMS  
SLOW WAIT  
HALT  
NORMAL RUN MODE  
REQUEST  
NEW SLOW  
FREQUENCY  
REQUEST  
Low  
POWER CONSUMPTION  
27/152  
ST72C171  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
6.3 WAIT MODE  
Figure 22. WAIT Mode Flow-chart  
WAIT mode places the MCU in a low power con-  
sumption mode by stopping the CPU.  
This power saving mode is selected by calling the  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
0
WFI INSTRUCTION  
CPU  
“WFI” ST7 software instruction.  
I BIT  
All peripherals remain active. During WAIT mode,  
the I bit of the CC register are forced to 0, to ena-  
ble all interrupts. All other registers and memory  
remain unchanged. The MCU remains in WAIT  
mode until an interrupt or Reset occurs, whereup-  
on the Program Counter branches to the starting  
address of the interrupt or Reset service routine.  
The MCU will remain in WAIT mode until a Reset  
or an Interrupt occurs, causing it to wake up.  
N
RESET  
Y
N
INTERRUPT  
Y
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
OFF  
ON  
1
Refer to Figure 22.  
I BIT  
4096 CPU CLOCK CYCLE  
DELAY  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1
I BIT (see note)  
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
Note: Before servicing an interrupt, the CC regis-  
ter is pushed on the stack. The I bit of the CC reg-  
ister is set during the interrupt routine and cleared  
when the CC register is popped.  
28/152  
ST72C171  
POWER SAVING MODES (Cont’d)  
6.4 HALT MODE  
Figure 24. HALT Mode Flow-chart  
The HALT mode is the lowest power consumption  
mode of the MCU. It is entered by executing the  
ST7 HALT instruction (see Figure 24).  
HALT INSTRUCTION  
ENABLE  
The MCU can exit HALT mode on reception of ei-  
ther an specific interrupt (see Table 4, “Interrupt  
Mapping,” on page 26) or a RESET. When exiting  
HALT mode by means of a RESET or an interrupt,  
the oscillator is immediately turned on and the  
4096 CPU cycle delay is used to stabilize the os-  
cillator. After the start up delay, the CPU resumes  
operation by servicing the interrupt or by fetching  
the reset vector which woke it up (see Figure 23).  
When entering HALT mode, the I bit in the CC reg-  
ister is forced to 0 to enable interrupts. Therefore,  
if an interrupt is pending, the MCU wakes immedi-  
ately.  
WATCHDOG  
0
DISABLE  
WDGHALT 1)  
1
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
OSCILLATOR  
OFF  
PERIPHERALS 2)  
OFF  
OFF  
0
CPU  
I BIT  
N
RESET  
In the HALT mode the main oscillator is turned off  
causing all internal processing to be stopped, in-  
cluding the operation of the on-chip peripherals.  
All peripherals are not clocked except the ones  
which get their clock supply from another clock  
generator (such as an external or auxiliary oscilla-  
tor).  
Y
N
INTERRUPT 3)  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
Y
ON  
OFF  
ON  
1
The compatibility of Watchdog operation with  
HALT mode is configured by the “WDGHALT” op-  
tion bit of the option byte. The HALT instruction  
when executed while the Watchdog system is en-  
abled, can generate a Watchdog RESET (see  
Section 11.1 OPTION BYTES for more details).  
I BIT  
4096 CPU CLOCK CYCLE  
DELAY  
OSCILLATOR  
PERIPHERALS  
CPU  
I BIT 4)  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1
Figure 23. HALT Mode Timing Overview  
4096 CPU CYCLE  
RUN  
HALT  
RUN  
DELAY  
FETCH RESET VECTOR  
OR SERVICE INTERRUPT  
HALT  
INSTRUCTION  
Notes:  
1. WDGHALT is an option bit. See option byte sec-  
tion for more details.  
2. Peripheral clocked with an external clock source  
RESET  
OR  
INTERRUPT  
FETCH  
VECTOR  
can still be active.  
3. Only some specific interrupts can exit the MCU  
from HALT mode (such as external interrupt). Re-  
fer to Table 4, “Interrupt Mapping,” on page 26 for  
more details.  
4. Before servicing an interrupt, the CC register is  
pushed on the stack. The I bit of the CC register is  
set during the interrupt routine and cleared when  
the CC register is popped.  
29/152  
ST72C171  
7 ON-CHIP PERIPHERALS  
7.1 I/O PORTS  
7.1.1 Introduction  
Interrupt function  
The I/O ports offer different functional modes:  
– transfer of data through digital inputs and outputs  
and for specific pins:  
When an I/O is configured in Input with Interrupt,  
an event on this I/O can generate an external In-  
terrupt request to the CPU. The interrupt sensitivi-  
ty is given independently according to the descrip-  
tion mentioned in the Miscellaneous register or in  
the interrupt register (where available).  
– analog signal input (ADC)  
– alternate signal input/output for the on-chip pe-  
ripherals.  
Each pin can independently generate an Interrupt  
request.  
– external interrupt generation  
Each external interrupt vector is linked to a dedi-  
cated group of I/O port pins (see Interrupts sec-  
tion). If more than one input pin is selected simul-  
taneously as interrupt source, this is logically  
ORed. For this reason if one of the interrupt pins is  
tied low, it masks the other ones.  
An I/O port is composed of up to 8 pins. Each pin  
can be programmed independently as digital input  
(with or without interrupt generation) or digital out-  
put.  
7.1.2 Functional Description  
Each port is associated to 2 main registers:  
– Data Register (DR)  
7.1.2.2 Output Mode  
The pin is configured in output mode by setting the  
corresponding DDR register bit.  
– Data Direction Register (DDR)  
In this mode, writing “0” or “1” to the DR register  
applies this digital value to the I/O pin through the  
latch. Then reading the DR register returns the  
previously stored value.  
and some of them to an optional register (see reg-  
ister description):  
– Option Register (OR)  
Each I/O pin may be programmed using the corre-  
sponding register bits in DDR and OR registers: bit  
X corresponding to pin X of the port. The same cor-  
respondence is used for the DR register.  
Note: In this mode, the interrupt function is disa-  
bled.  
7.1.2.3 Digital Alternate Function  
When an on-chip peripheral is configured to use a  
pin, the alternate function is automatically select-  
ed. This alternate function takes priority over  
standard I/O programming. When the signal is  
coming from an on-chip peripheral, the I/O pin is  
automatically configured in output mode (push-pull  
or open drain according to the peripheral).  
The following description takes into account the  
OR register, for specific ports which do not provide  
this register refer to the I/O Port Implementation  
Section 7.1.2.5. The generic I/O block diagram is  
shown on Figure 26.  
7.1.2.1 Input Modes  
The input configuration is selected by clearing the  
corresponding DDR register bit.  
When the signal is going to an on-chip peripheral,  
the I/O pin has to be configured in input mode. In  
this case, the pin’s state is also digitally readable  
by addressing the DR register.  
In this case, reading the DR register returns the  
digital value applied to the external I/O pin.  
Different input modes can be selected by software  
through the OR register.  
Notes:  
1. Input pull-up configuration can cause an unex-  
pected value at the input of the alternate peripher-  
al input.  
2. When the on-chip peripheral uses a pin as input  
and output, this pin must be configured as an input  
(DDR = 0).  
Notes:  
1. All the inputs are triggered by a Schmitt trigger.  
2. When switching from input mode to output  
mode, the DR register should be written first to  
output the correct value as soon as the port is con-  
figured as an output.  
Warning: The alternate function must not be acti-  
vated as long as the pin is configured as input with  
interrupt, in order to avoid generating spurious in-  
terrupts.  
30/152  
ST72C171  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
7.1.2.4 Analog Alternate Function  
7.1.2.5 I/O Port Implementation  
When the pin is used as an ADC input the I/O must  
be configured as input, floating. The analog multi-  
plexer (controlled by the ADC registers) switches  
the analog voltage present on the selected pin to  
the common analog rail which is connected to the  
ADC input.  
The hardware implementation on each I/O port de-  
pends on the settings in the DDR and OR registers  
and specific feature of the I/O port such as ADC In-  
put (see Figure 26) or true open drain. Switching  
these I/O ports from one state to another should  
be done in a sequence that prevents unwanted  
side effects. Recommended safe transitions are il-  
lustrated in Figure 25. Other transitions are poten-  
tially risky and should be avoided, since they are  
likely to present unwanted side-effects such as  
spurious interrupt generation.  
It is recommended not to change the voltage level  
or loading on any port pin while conversion is in  
progress. Furthermore it is recommended not to  
have clocking pins located close to a selected an-  
alog pin.  
Warning: The analog input voltage level must be  
within the limits stated in the Absolute Maximum  
Ratings.  
Figure 25. Recommended I/O State Transition Diagram  
OUTPUT  
push-pull  
INPUT  
no interrupt  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
with interrupt  
open-drain  
31/152  
ST72C171  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Figure 26. I/O Block Diagram  
ALTERNATE ENABLE  
1
V
ALTERNATE  
OUTPUT  
DD  
M
U
X
P-BUFFER  
(SEE TABLE BELOW)  
0
DR  
LATCH  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
PULL-UP (SEE TABLE BELOW)  
PULL-UP  
CONDITION  
DDR  
LATCH  
PAD  
OR  
ANALOG ENABLE  
(ADC)  
LATCH  
(SEE TABLE BELOW)  
ANALOG  
SWITCH  
OR SEL  
(SEE NOTE BELOW)  
DDR SEL  
N-BUFFER  
ALTERNATE  
ENABLE  
1
0
DR SEL  
M
U
X
GND  
ALTERNATE INPUT  
CMOS  
SCHMITT TRIGGER  
SENSITIVITY  
SEL  
FROM  
OTHER  
BITS  
EXTERNAL  
INTERRUPT  
SOURCE (EIx)  
Table 5. Port Mode Configuration  
Configuration Mode  
Floating  
Pull-up  
P-buffer  
0
0
Pull-up  
1
0
Push-pull  
0
1
True Open Drain  
Open Drain (logic level)  
not present  
0
not present  
0
Legend:  
Notes:  
– No OR Register on some ports (see register map).  
– ADC Switch on ports with analog alternate functions.  
0 -  
1 -  
present, not activated  
present and activated  
32/152  
ST72C171  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
7.1.2.6 Device Specific Configurations  
Table 6. Port Configuration  
Input (DDR =0)  
OR = 1  
Output (DDR=1)  
Port  
Pin name  
PA7: PA0  
PB0:PB4  
OR = 0  
OR = 0  
OR = 1  
Port A  
floating*  
pull-up with interrupt  
pull-up with interrupt  
open drain  
push-pull  
open drain  
floating*  
push-pull  
high sink capability  
Port B  
PB5:PB7  
PC0:PC5  
floating*  
floating*  
pull-up with interrupt  
pull-up  
open drain  
open drain  
push-pull  
push-pull  
Port C  
*Reset state.  
33/152  
ST72C171  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
7.1.3 Register Description  
DATA REGISTERS  
Port A Data Register (PADR)  
Port B Data Register (PBDR)  
Port C Data Register (PCDR)  
OPTION REGISTERS  
PORT A Option Register (PAOR)  
PORT B Option Register (PBOR)  
PORT C Option Register (PCOR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h) (no interrupt)  
7
0
7
0
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
O7  
O6  
O5  
O4  
O3  
O2  
O1  
O0  
Bit 7:0 = D[7:0] Data Register 8 bits.  
The DR register has a specific behaviour accord-  
ing to the selected input/output configuration. Writ-  
ing the DR register is always taken in account  
even if the pin is configured as an input. Reading  
the DR register returns either the DR register latch  
content (pin configured as output) or the digital val-  
ue applied to the I/O pin (pin configured as input).  
Bit 7:0 = O[7:0] Option Register 8 bits.  
The PAOR, PBOR and PCOR registers are used  
to select pull-up or floating configuration in input  
mode.  
Each bit is set and cleared by software.  
Input mode:  
0: Floating input  
1: Input pull-up (with or without interrupt see Table  
6)  
DATA DIRECTION REGISTERS  
Port A Data Direction Register (PADDR)  
Port B Data Direction Register (PBDDR)  
Port C Data Direction Register (PCDDR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h) (input mode)  
7
0
DD7  
DD6  
DD5  
DD4  
DD3 DD2  
DD1  
DD0  
Bit 7:0 = DD[7:0] Data Direction Register 8 bits.  
The DDR register gives the input/output direction  
configuration of the pins. Each bits is set and  
cleared by software.  
0: Input mode  
1: Output mode  
34/152  
ST72C171  
I/O PORTS (Cont’d)  
Table 7. I/O Port Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PADR  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
0000h  
0001h  
0002h  
0004h  
0005h  
0006h  
0008h  
0009h  
000Ah  
Reset Value  
PADDR  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
DD4  
0
DD3  
0
DD2  
0
DD1  
0
DD0  
0
Reset Value  
PAOR  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
O4  
0
O3  
0
O2  
0
O1  
0
O0  
0
Reset Value  
PBDR  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
Reset Value  
PBDDR  
DD7  
0
DD6  
0
DD5  
0
DD4  
0
DD3  
0
DD2  
0
DD1  
0
DD0  
0
Reset Value  
PBOR  
O7  
0
O6  
0
O5  
0
O4  
0
O3  
0
O2  
0
O1  
0
O0  
0
Reset Value  
PCDR  
D7  
0
D6  
0
D5  
0
D4  
0
D3  
0
D2  
0
D1  
0
D0  
0
Reset Value  
PCDDR  
DD7  
0
DD6  
0
DD5  
0
DD4  
0
DD3  
0
DD2  
0
DD1  
0
DD0  
0
Reset Value  
PCOR  
O7  
0
O6  
0
O5  
0
O4  
0
O3  
0
O2  
0
O1  
0
O0  
0
Reset Value  
35/152  
ST72C171  
7.2 MISCELLANEOUS REGISTERS  
7.2.1 Miscellaneous Register 1 (MISCR1)  
Miscellaneous register 1 is used select SLOW op-  
erating mode. Bits 3, 4, 6, and 7 determine the po-  
larity of external interrupt requests.  
Bit 4:3 = PEI[1:0] Polarity Options of External In-  
terrupt ei0. (Port A)  
These bits determine which event causes the ex-  
ternal interrupt (ei0) on port A according to Table  
9.  
Register Address: 0020h  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Table 9. ei0 Ext. Int. Polarity Options  
MODE  
PEI1  
PEI0  
7
0
Falling edge and low level  
(Reset state)  
0
0
PEI3 PEI2 MCO PEI1 PEI0 CP1 CP0 SMS  
Rising edge only  
Falling edge only  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Bit 7:6 = PEI[3:2] Polarity Options of External In-  
terrupt ei1. (Port B).  
These bits are set and cleared by software. These  
bits determine which event causes the external in-  
terrupt (ei1) on port B according to Table 8.  
Rising and falling edge  
Table 8. ei1 Ext. Int. Polarity Options  
Bit 2:1 = CP[1:0] CPU clock prescaler  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
determine the CPU clock when the SMS bit is set  
according to the following table.  
MODE  
PEI3 PEI2  
Falling edge and low level  
(Reset state)  
0
0
Table 10. f  
Value in Slow Mode  
Rising edge only  
Falling edge only  
0
1
1
1
0
1
CPU  
f
Value  
CP1  
CP0  
CPU  
fOSC / 4  
OSC / 8  
Rising and falling edge  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
f
Bit 5 = MCO Main clock out selection  
f
OSC / 16  
OSC / 32  
This bit enables the MCO alternate function on the  
I/O port. It is set and cleared by software.  
0: MCO alternate function disabled  
f
(I/O pin free for general-purpose I/O)  
1: MCO alternate function enabled  
Bit 0 = SMS Slow Mode Select  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: Normal Mode - f = f / 2  
(f  
/2 on I/O port)  
OSC  
CPU  
OSC  
This bit is set and cleared by software. When set it  
can be used to output the internal clock to the ded-  
icated I/O port.  
1: Slow Mode - the f  
PC[1:0] bits.  
value is determined by the  
CPU  
36/152  
ST72C171  
7.2.2 Miscellaneous Register 2 (MISCR2)  
floating input. This should be done prior to setting  
the P1OS bit.  
Miscellaneous register 2 is used to configure of  
SPI and the output selection of the PWMs.  
Register Address: 0040h  
Read/Write  
Bit 2 = P0OS PWM0 output select  
This bit is used to select the output for the PWM0  
channel of ART/PWM Timer.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
0: PWM0 output on PWM0 pin  
1: PWM0 output on PWM0R pin and connected to  
the OA1PIN pin  
7
0
-
-
-
SPIOD P1OS P0OS SSM SSI  
Note: In order to use the PC2 port pin as a PWM  
output pin, bit 2 of port C must be programmed as  
floating input. This should be done prior to setting  
the P0OS bit.  
Bit 7:5 = not used  
Bit 4 = SPIOD SPI output disable  
This bit is used to disable the SPI output on the I/O  
port (in both master or slave mode).  
0: SPI output enabled  
Bit 1 = SSM SS mode selection  
It is set and cleared by software.  
0: Normal mode - SS uses information coming  
from the SS pin of the SPI.  
1: SPI output disabled  
(I/O pin free for general-purpose I/O)  
1: I/O mode, the SPI uses the information stored  
into bit SSI.  
Bit 3 = P1OS PWM1 output select  
This bit is used to select the output for the PWM1  
channel of the ART/PWM Timer.  
0: PWM1 output on PWM1 pin  
1: PWM1 output on PWM1R pin and connected to  
the OA2PIN pin  
Bit 0 = SSI SS internal mode  
This bit replaces pin SS of the SPI when bit SSM is  
set to 1. (see SPI description). It is set and cleared  
by software.  
Note: In order to use the PC1 port pin as a PWM  
output pin, bit 1 of port C must be programmed as  
37/152  
ST72C171  
7.3 OP-AMP MODULE  
7.3.1 Introduction  
have a gain of 2, 4 or 8, they may be used for ex-  
tending the ADC precision (analog zooming).  
The ST7 Op-Amp module is designed to cover  
most types of microcontroller applications where  
analog signal amplifiers are used.  
The 2 inverting inputs of OA1 or OA2 may be used  
to achieve this function. The input impedance of  
these inputs is around 2K.  
It may be used to perform a a variety of functions  
such as: differential voltage amplifier, comparator/  
threshold detector, ADC zooming, impedance  
adaptor, general purpose operational amplifier.  
The ART Timer PWM resistive outputs are inter-  
nally connected to OA1PIN and OA2PIN pins. The  
PWM outputs are enabled by the PWMCR register  
and the resistive outputs are selected by Miscella-  
neous register 2. Refer to Figure 28.  
7.3.2 Main features  
This module includes:  
The inverting input of OA1 or OA2 may be con-  
nected to an I/O pin, to the analog ground or may  
be left unconnected (in this case the SPGA can be  
used as a repeater, with the output of the SPGA  
connected to this input via the resistive loopback).  
2 rail-to-rail SPGAs (Software Programmable  
Gain Amplifier), and 1 stand alone rail-to-rail  
Op-Amp that may be externally connected using  
I/O pins  
A band gap voltage reference  
A programmable eight-step reference voltage  
7.3.3.2 Outputs  
ART Timer PWM outputs internally connected  
The SPGA outputs are connected either to exter-  
nal pins or, internally, to the ADC input (Channel 8  
& 9). The output value, digitized by a Schmitt trig-  
ger, may be read by the application software or  
may generate an interrupt.  
to SPGAs input 1 and 2.  
SPGAs and Op-Amp outputs are internally  
connected to the ADC inputs (Channel 8, 9 &  
10).  
Input offset compensation  
The OA3 output is connected to an ADC input  
(Channel 10).  
7.3.3 General description  
The module contains two SPGAs (OA1 & OA2)  
and 1 stand alone operational amplifier (OA3) de-  
pending on the device package. OA1 and OA2  
each have associated circuitry for input and gain  
selection. The third operational amplifier, OA3,  
without input and gain selection circuitry, is availa-  
ble in some devices (see device pin out descrip-  
tion).  
7.3.3.3 Advanced features  
The gain of OA1 or OA2 is programmed using an  
internal resistive network. The possible values are:  
1, 2, 4, 8 and 16. The internal resistive loopback  
may also be de-activated in order to obtain the  
open-loop gain (comparator) or to use the op-amp  
with an external loopback network.  
7.3.3.1 Inputs  
Input offset compensation  
The non-inverting input of OA1 or OA2 may be  
connected to an I/O pin, to the band-gap reference  
voltage, to an 8-step voltage reference or to the  
analog ground.  
In a special calibration mode (autozero mode), the  
negative input pin of OA1 or OA2 can be connect-  
ed internally to the positive input pin. This mode al-  
lows the measurement of the input offset voltage  
of the SPGA using the ADC. This value may be  
stored in RAM and subsequently used for offset  
correction (for ADC conversions). Refer to Section  
9.3.4.  
The eight-step voltage reference uses a resistive  
network in order to generate two voltages between  
1/8 V  
and V  
(in 1/8 V  
steps) that can be  
DD  
DD  
DD  
connected to the non-inverting input of the two SP-  
GAs. These voltages may be used as programma-  
ble thresholds with the corresponding SPGA used  
as a comparator or, with the SPGA programmed to  
38/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE (Cont’d)  
Figure 27. Op-Amp Module Block Diagram  
NS1[2:0] bits  
OA1NIN  
G1[2:0] bits  
15R /16R  
V
SSA  
R=2K  
AZ1 bit  
ART Timer  
PWM0R  
Output  
R
AV =1, 2, 4, 8, 16, ∞  
CL  
VR1E, PS1[1:0] bits  
R=2K  
To ADC Channel 8  
OA1PIN  
OA1  
OA1O  
VR1[2:0] bits  
x V /8  
OA1V  
bit  
DDA  
Band Gap  
Reference  
Voltage  
8-Step Reference  
Voltage 1  
OA1IE bit  
OA1  
Interrupt  
(1.2V)  
NS2[2:0] bits  
OA2NIN  
G2[2:0] bits  
15R /16R  
V
SSA  
R=2K  
ART Timer  
PWM1R  
Output  
R
AZ2 bit  
AV =1, 2, 4, 8, 16, ∞  
CL  
VR2E, PS2[1:0] bits  
To ADC Channel 9  
OA2PIN  
OA2  
R=2K  
OA2O  
VR2[2:0] bits  
x V /8  
OA2V  
bit  
DDA  
Band Gap  
8-Step Reference  
Voltage 2  
Reference  
Voltage  
(1.2V)  
OA2IE bit  
OA2  
Interrupt  
To ADC Channel 10  
OA3NIN  
OA3PIN  
OA3  
OA3O  
Note: OA3 is not present on some package types. Refer to the device pin description.  
39/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE (Cont’d)  
7.3.4 Autozero Mode  
Voff =( Vo- V’o) /G  
When the following description refers to both OA1  
or OA2, x stands for 1 or 2.  
As the offset voltage of the SPGAs may vary with  
the common mode voltage value, the measure-  
ment must be done choosing VRx to match the ap-  
plication conditions. Alternatively, nine measure-  
ments may be done with the noninverting input  
In order to eliminate the ADC errors due to the  
SPGA offset voltage, this voltage may be deter-  
mined, prior to the A/D conversion (at power on or  
periodically) and stored in RAM. The stored value  
may be used afterwards to eliminate the errors of  
any A/D conversion that uses the SPGA (ADC  
zooming). The measurement may be done inde-  
pendently for OA1 and OA2.  
voltage varying between 0 and V  
in 1/8 V  
DDA  
DD  
steps, in order to fully characterise the offset volt-  
age of the op-amp.  
The measurement algorithm has 3 steps:  
7.3.5 Comparator mode with Interrupts  
1. The SPGA is in repeater mode (NSx[1:0] = 01),  
with the lowest gain (Gx[2:0]=000), the autoze-  
roing switch is left open (AZx = 0). The positive  
input of the op-amp is connected to a DC value,  
using the VRx reference voltage generator  
(PSx[1:0] = 00), and the output is sent to the  
ADC. Under these conditions, the ADC meas-  
ures the value:  
The 2 SPGAs can be configured in comparator  
mode (GX[2:0]=111). In this case the positive in-  
put can be connected to the internal reference  
voltage. The negative input can be used to receive  
the analog voltage to be compared with the volt-  
age connected to the positive input.  
By means of a Schmitt trigger, the SPGA output is  
readable as a logical level in the OAxVR bit in the  
OAIRR register. These bits are read only.  
Vo = VRx -Voff  
of the SPGA output.  
2. Set the gain (G) according the application  
requirement. The AZx bit is set to 1. The output  
voltage of the SPGA becomes:  
An interrupt request remains pending as long as  
the output value (OAxVR) is equal to the corre-  
sponding polarity bit (OAxPR) and when the inter-  
rupt enable bit (OAxIE) is set. There is one inter-  
rupt vector for each SPGA.  
V’o = VRx - Voff - G * Voff  
3.Voff calculated with 1) - 2)  
40/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE (Cont’d)  
This feature allows the microcontroller to be used  
as a Digital to Analog converter and generating a  
DC voltage on the positive input pin, so the SPGAs  
may be used for the following functions:  
7.3.6 DAC Function using ART Timer PWMR  
Outputs  
The PWMR outputs are connected to a serial re-  
sistor and internally connected to the OA1PIN/  
OA2PIN inputs. An external capacitor must be  
connected to the PWM0R/OA1PIN and/or  
PWM1R/OA2PIN pins (see Figure 28) if the  
PWMR outputs are used.  
– A comparator  
– An amplifier of an external voltage connected to  
the negative input pin (OA1NIN or OA2NIN).  
– A repeater, to obtain the same voltage on the OA  
output pin as on the input pin, with increased cur-  
rent capability.  
Figure 28. Connection of PWMR outputs to OA1 or OA2 for DAC Function  
MISC2 REGISTER  
P1OS  
P0OS  
PWMCR REGISTER  
OE0  
OE1  
0.7K (typ)  
PWM0R/OA1PIN  
PWM0  
R
int  
C
ext  
PWM/ART TIMER  
OA1  
P1OS  
OE1  
0.7K (max)  
PWM1R/OA2PIN  
PWM1  
R
int  
C
ext  
OA2  
OPAMP MODULE  
41/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE (Cont’d)  
7.3.7 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on op-amp.  
WAIT  
SPGA interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
No effect on op-amp.  
SPGA interrupts cause the device to exit from HALT mode.  
HALT  
Note: Low Power modes have no effect on the SPGAs & the Op-Amp. They can be switched off to reduce  
the power consumption of the ST7 (OAxON bits).  
7.3.8 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
Op-Amp 1 output in comparator mode equals to OA1P bit value  
Op-Amp 2 output in comparator mode equals to OA2P bit value  
NA*  
NA*  
OA1IE  
OA2IE  
Yes  
Yes  
* The interrupt event occurs when the OAxP bit equals the OAxV bit value.  
Note: The SPGA interrupt events are connected to 2 interrupt vectors (see Interrupts chapter). These  
events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt mask in the  
CC register is reset (RIM instruction).  
42/152  
ST72C171  
7.3.9 Register Description  
Bit 1:0 = NS1[1:0] Negative Input Select.  
OA1 CONTROL REGISTER (OA1CR)  
Read/Write  
These bits are set and reset by software and con-  
trol the OA1 positive input selection.  
Reset value: 0000 00000 (00h)  
OA1 Negative Input  
AGND  
NS11  
NS10  
7
0
0
0
1
0
1
X
Floating - Repeater mode  
OA1NIN  
AZ1  
G12  
G11  
G10  
PS11 PS10 NS11 NS10  
Bit 7 = AZ1 OA1 Autozero Mode.  
This bit is set and reset by hardware. It enables  
Autozero mode (used to measure the OA1 input  
offset).  
0: Autozero mode disabled  
1: Autozero mode enabled  
OA2 CONTROL REGISTER (OA2CR)  
Read/Write  
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
AZ2  
G22  
G21  
G20  
PS21 PS20 NS21 NS20  
Bit 6:4 = G1[2:0] Gain Control.  
These bits are set and reset by software and con-  
trol the OA1 gain by modifying the resistive loop-  
back network. The value of the gain is adjusted to  
the desired value (for inverting / non-inverting am-  
plification) corresponding to the selected positive  
input source - see PS1[1:0] table, Gain Adjust col-  
umn.  
Bit 7 = AZ2 OA2 Autozero Mode.  
This bit is set and reset by hardware. It enables  
Autozero mode (used to measure the OA2 input  
offset).  
0: Autozero mode disabled  
1: Autozero mode enabled  
Gain  
G12  
G11  
G10  
Bit 6:4 = G2[2:0] Gain Control.  
inv / Ninv  
-1 / 2  
These bits are set and reset by software and con-  
trol the OA2 gain by modifying the resistive loop-  
back network. The value of the gain is adjusted to  
the desired value (for inverting/noninverting ampli-  
fication) corresponding to the selected positive in-  
put source - see PS2[1:0] table, Gain Adjust col-  
umn.  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
-2 / 3  
-3 / 4  
-4 / 5  
-8 / 8  
-16 / 16  
Comparator  
External Loopback  
Gain  
1
1
1
G22  
G21  
G20  
inv / Ninv  
-1 / 2  
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
-2 / 3  
Bit 3:2 = PS1[1:0] Positive Input Select / Gain ad-  
-3 / 4  
just.  
-4 / 5  
These bits are set and reset by software and con-  
trol the OA1 positive input selection.  
-8 / 8  
-16 / 16  
Gain  
Adj.  
Comparator  
External Loopback  
OA1 Positive Input  
PS11 PS10  
1
1
1
8-step Ref.Voltage 1  
OA1PIN  
inv  
0
0
1
0
1
0
ninv  
inv  
Band Gap Ref. Voltage (1.2V)  
43/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE (Cont’d)  
Bit 3:2 = PS2[1:0] Positive Input Select / Gain ad-  
just.  
OA3 CONTROL REGISTER  
(OA3CR)  
Read/Write  
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
These bits are set and reset by software and con-  
trol the OA2 positive input selection.t  
7
0
-
Gain  
Adj.  
OA2 Positive Input  
PS21 PS20  
OA3ON  
-
-
-
-
-
-
8-step Ref.Voltage 1  
OA2PIN  
inv  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
ninv  
inv  
Bit 7 = OA3ON OA3 on/off (low power)  
Band Gap Ref. Voltage (1.2V)  
Floating  
Stand Alone Op-Amp on/off control bit, it is set and  
reset by software. It reduces power consumption  
when reset.  
ninv  
0: Op-amp 3 off  
1: Op-amp 3 on  
Bit 1:0 = NS2[1:0] Negative Input Select.  
These bits are set and reset by software and con-  
trol the OA2 negative input selection.  
Note: This bit must be kept cleared in devices  
without OA3 (refer to device block diagram and pin  
description)  
OA2 Negative Input  
AGND  
NS21  
NS20  
0
0
1
0
1
X
Floating -Repeater mode  
OA2NIN  
Bit 6:0 = Reserved.  
44/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE (Cont’d)  
OP-AMP INTERRUPT AND READOUT REGIS-  
TER (OAIRR)  
Read/Write*  
Bit 3 = OA2IE OA2 interrupt enable  
This bit is set and reset by software. When it is set,  
it enables an interrupt to be generated if the OA2P  
bit and the OA2V bit have the same value.  
0: OA2 interrupt disabled  
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
OA1IE OA1P OA1V OA1ON OA2IE OA2P OA2V OA2ON  
1: OA2 interrupt enabled  
Bit 7 = OA1IE OA1 interrupt enable  
This bit is set and reset by software. When it is set,  
it enables an interrupt to be generated if the OA1P  
bit and the OA1V bit have the same value.  
0: OA1 interrupt disabled  
Bit 2 = OA2P OA2 interrupt polarity select  
This bit is set and reset by software. It specifies the  
OA2 SPGA output level which will generate an in-  
terrupt if the bit OA2IE is set.  
0: Active low  
1: OA1 interrupt enabled  
1: Active high  
Bit 6 = OA1P OA1 interrupt polarity select  
This bit is set and reset by software. It specifies the  
OA1 SPGA output level which will generate an in-  
terrupt if the bit OA1IE is set.  
0: Active low  
1: Active high  
Bit 1- OA2V OA2 output value (read only)  
This bit is set and reset by hardware. It contains  
the OA2 SPGA output voltage value filtered by a  
Schmitt trigger.  
0: OA2+ voltage < OA2- voltage  
1: OA2+ voltage > OA2- voltage  
Bit 5 = OA1V OA1 output value (read only)  
This bit is set and reset by hardware. It contains  
the OA1 SPGA output voltage value filtered by a  
Schmitt trigger.  
Bit 0 - OA2ON OA2 on/off (low power)  
0: Op-amp 2 off (reducing power consumption)  
1: Op-amp 2 on  
0: OA1+ voltage < OA1- voltage  
1: OA1+ voltage > OA1- voltage  
Note: If OA1ON, OA2ON and OA3ON are 0, The  
entire module is disabled, giving the lowest power  
consumption.  
Bit 4 = OA1ON OA1 on/off (low power)  
* OA1V and OA2V are read only.  
This bit is set and reset by software. It reduces  
power consumption when reset.  
0: Op-amp 1 off  
1: Op-amp 1 on  
45/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE (Cont’d)  
VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER  
(OAVRCR)  
Read/Write  
Bit 3= VR1E VR1 Enable  
This bit is set and reset by software. When the ref-  
ererence voltage is selected (PS1[1:0] = 00 in the  
Reset value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
OA1CR register) it connects V  
or Reference Voltage 1 (VR1) to the OA1 positive  
input.  
(analog ground)  
SSA  
7
0
0: OA1 positive input is connected to V  
1: OA1 positive input is connected to VR1 voltage  
value  
SSA  
VR2E VR22 VR21 VR20 VR1E VR12 VR11 VR10  
Bit 7 = VR2E: VR2 Enable  
This bit is set and reset by software. When the ref-  
ererence voltage is selected (PS2[1:0] = 00 in the  
Bit 2:0 - VR1[2:0] Voltage selection for channel 1  
of the 8-step reference voltage  
OA2CR register) it connects V  
(analog ground)  
SSA  
or Reference Voltage 2 (VR2) to the OA2 positive  
input.  
These bits are set and reset by software, they  
specify the Reference Voltage 1 (VR1) connected  
to the OA1 positive input when PS1[1:0] = 00 in  
the OA1CR register.  
0: OA2 positive input is connected to V  
SSA  
1: OA2 positive input is connected to VR2 voltage  
value  
Reference  
VR1E  
VR12  
VR11  
VR10  
Voltage 1  
Bit 6:4 = VR2[2:0] Voltage selection for channel 2  
of the 8-step reference voltage  
These bits are set and reset by software, they  
specify the Reference Voltage 2 (VR2) connected  
to the OA2 positive input when PS2[1:0] = 00 in  
the OA2CR register..  
0 (V  
)
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
x
0
1
0
1
0
1
SSA  
V
/8  
DDA  
2 x V  
3 x V  
4 x V  
5 x V  
6 x V  
7 x V  
/8  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
/8  
/8  
/8  
/8  
/8  
Reference  
Voltage 2  
VR2E  
VR22  
VR21  
VR20  
0 (V  
)
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
x
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
x
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SSA  
V
V
/8  
DDA  
2 x V  
3 x V  
4 x V  
5 x V  
6 x V  
7 x V  
/8  
/8  
/8  
/8  
/8  
/8  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
DDA  
Note: When both VR2E and VR1E are reset, the  
8-step voltage reference cell is disabled and en-  
ters low power mode.  
V
46/152  
ST72C171  
Table 11. OP-AMP Module Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
OA1CR  
AZ1  
0
G12  
0
G11  
0
G10  
0
PS11  
0
PS10  
0
NS11  
0
NS10  
0
001Bh  
001Ch  
001Dh  
001Eh  
001Fh  
Reset Value  
OA2CR  
AZ2  
0
G22  
0
G21  
0
G20  
0
PS21  
0
PS20  
0
NS21  
0
NS20  
0
Reset Value  
OA3CR  
OA3ON  
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
Reset Value  
OIRR  
OA1IE  
0
OA1P  
0
OA1V  
0
OA2ON  
0
OA2IE  
0
OA2P  
0
OA2V  
0
OA1ON  
0
Reset Value  
VRCR  
VR2E  
0
VR22  
0
VR21  
0
VR20  
0
VR1E  
0
VR12  
0
VR11  
0
VR10  
0
Reset Value  
47/152  
ST72C171  
7.4 WATCHDOG TIMER (WDG)  
7.4.1 Introduction  
cles, and the length of the timeout period can be  
programmed by the user in 64 increments.  
The Watchdog timer is used to detect the occur-  
rence of a software fault, usually generated by ex-  
ternal interference or by unforeseen logical condi-  
tions, which causes the application program to  
abandon its normal sequence. The Watchdog cir-  
cuit generates an MCU reset on expiry of a pro-  
grammed time period, unless the program refresh-  
es the counter’s contents before the T6 bit be-  
comes cleared.  
If the watchdog is activated (the WDGA bit is set)  
and when the 7-bit timer (bits T6:T0) rolls over  
from 40h to 3Fh (T6 becomes cleared), it initiates  
a reset cycle pulling low the reset pin for typically  
500ns.  
The application program must write in the CR reg-  
ister at regular intervals during normal operation to  
prevent an MCU reset. The value to be stored in  
the CR register must be between FFh and C0h  
(see Table 13 . Watchdog Timing (fCPU = 8  
MHz)):  
7.4.2 Main Features  
Programmable timer (64 increments of 12288  
CPU cycles)  
– The WDGA bit is set (watchdog enabled)  
Programmable reset  
– The T6 bit is set to prevent generating an imme-  
diate reset  
Reset (if watchdog activated) when the T6 bit  
reaches zero  
Optional  
reset  
on  
HALT  
instruction  
– The T5:T0 bits contain the number of increments  
which represents the time delay before the  
watchdog produces a reset.  
(configurable by option byte)  
Hardware Watchdog selectable by option byte.  
7.4.3 Functional Description  
The counter value stored in the CR register (bits  
T6:T0), is decremented every 12,288 machine cy-  
Figure 29. Watchdog Block Diagram  
RESET  
WATCHDOG CONTROL REGISTER (CR)  
T5  
WDGA T6  
T1  
T0  
T4  
T2  
T3  
7-BIT DOWNCOUNTER  
CLOCK DIVIDER  
f
CPU  
÷12288  
48/152  
ST72C171  
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)  
Table 12. Watchdog Timing (f  
= 8 MHz)  
reset immediately after waking up the microcon-  
troller.  
CPU  
CR Register  
initial value  
WDG timeout period  
(ms)  
– When using an external interrupt to wake up the  
microcontroller, reinitialize the corresponding I/O  
as “Input Pull-up with Interrupt” before executing  
the HALT instruction. The main reason for this is  
that the I/O may be wrongly configured due to ex-  
ternal interference or by an unforeseen logical  
condition.  
Max  
Min  
FFh  
C0h  
98.304  
1.536  
Notes: Following a reset, the watchdog is disa-  
bled. Once activated it cannot be disabled, except  
by a reset.  
– For the same reason, reinitialize the level sensi-  
tiveness of each external interrupt as a precau-  
tionary measure.  
The T6 bit can be used to generate a software re-  
set (the WDGA bit is set and the T6 bit is cleared).  
– The opcode for the HALT instruction is 0x8E. To  
avoid an unexpected HALT instruction due to a  
program counter failure, it is advised to clear all  
occurrences of the data value 0x8E from memo-  
ry. For example, avoid defining a constant in  
ROM with the value 0x8E.  
7.4.4 Hardware Watchdog Option  
If Hardware Watchdog is selected by option byte,  
the watchdog is always active and the WDGA bit in  
the CR is not used.  
– As the HALT instruction clears the I bit in the CC  
register to allow interrupts, the user may choose  
to clear all pending interrupt bits before execut-  
ing the HALT instruction. This avoids entering  
other peripheral interrupt routines after executing  
the external interrupt routine corresponding to  
the wake-up event (reset or external interrupt).  
Refer to the device-specific Option Byte descrip-  
tion.  
7.4.5 Low Power Modes  
WAIT Instruction  
No effect on Watchdog.  
HALT Instruction  
7.4.6 Interrupts  
If the Watchdog reset on HALT option is selected  
by option byte, a HALT instruction causes an im-  
mediate reset generation if the Watchdog is acti-  
vated (WDGA bit is set).  
None.  
7.4.7 Register Description  
CONTROL REGISTER (CR)  
Read/Write  
7.4.5.1 Using Halt Mode with the WDG (option)  
If the Watchdog reset on HALT option is not se-  
lected by option byte, the Halt mode can be used  
when the watchdog is enabled.  
Reset Value: 0111 1111 (7Fh)  
7
0
In this case, the HALT instruction stops the oscilla-  
tor. When the oscillator is stopped, the WDG stops  
counting and is no longer able to generate a reset  
until the microcontroller receives an external inter-  
rupt or a reset.  
WDGA T6  
T5  
T4  
T3  
T2  
T1  
T0  
Bit 7 = WDGA Activation bit.  
This bit is set by software and only cleared by  
hardware after a reset. When WDGA = 1, the  
watchdog can generate a reset.  
0: Watchdog disabled  
1: Watchdog enabled  
If an external interrupt is received, the WDG re-  
starts counting after 4096 CPU clocks. If a reset is  
generated, the WDG is disabled (reset state).  
Recommendations  
– Make sure that an external event is available to  
wake up the microcontroller from Halt mode.  
Bit 6:0 = T[6:0] 7-bit timer (MSB to LSB).  
These bits contain the decremented value. A reset  
is produced when it rolls over from 40h to 3Fh (T6  
becomes cleared).  
– Before executing the HALT instruction, refresh  
the WDG counter, to avoid an unexpected WDG  
49/152  
ST72C171  
WATCHDOG TIMER (Cont’d)  
Table 13. WDG Register Map  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Name  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CR  
24  
WDGA  
0
T6  
1
T5  
1
T4  
1
T3  
1
T2  
1
T1  
1
T0  
1
Reset Value  
50/152  
ST72C171  
7.5 16-BIT TIMER  
7.5.1 Introduction  
7.5.3 Functional Description  
7.5.3.1 Counter  
The timer consists of a 16-bit free-running counter  
driven by a programmable prescaler.  
The main block of the Programmable Timer is a  
16-bit free running upcounter and its associated  
16-bit registers. The 16-bit registers are made up  
of two 8-bit registers called high & low.  
It may be used for a variety of purposes, including  
measuring the pulse lengths of up to two input sig-  
nals (input capture) or generating up to two output  
waveforms (output compare and PWM).  
Counter Register (CR):  
Pulse lengths and waveform periods can be mod-  
ulated from a few microseconds to several milli-  
seconds using the timer prescaler and the CPU  
clock prescaler.  
– Counter High Register (CHR) is the most sig-  
nificant byte (MS Byte).  
– Counter Low Register (CLR) is the least sig-  
nificant byte (LS Byte).  
Some ST7 devices have two on-chip 16-bit timers.  
They are completely independent, and do not  
share any resources. They are synchronized after  
a MCU reset as long as the timer clock frequen-  
cies are not modified.  
Alternate Counter Register (ACR)  
– Alternate Counter High Register (ACHR) is the  
most significant byte (MS Byte).  
– Alternate Counter Low Register (ACLR) is the  
least significant byte (LS Byte).  
This description covers one or two 16-bit timers. In  
ST7 devices with two timers, register names are  
prefixed with TA (Timer A) or TB (Timer B).  
These two read-only 16-bit registers contain the  
same value but with the difference that reading the  
ACLR register does not clear the TOF bit (Timer  
overflow flag), located in the Status register (SR).  
(See note at the end of paragraph titled 16-bit read  
sequence).  
7.5.2 Main Features  
Programmableprescaler:fCPU dividedby2, 4or8.  
Overflow status flag and maskable interrupt  
External clock input (must be at least 4 times  
slowerthan theCPUclockspeed)with thechoice  
of active edge  
Output compare functions with:  
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers  
– 2 dedicated programmable signals  
– 2 dedicated status flags  
Writing in the CLR register or ACLR register resets  
the free running counter to the FFFCh value.  
Both counters have a reset value of FFFCh (this is  
the only value which is reloaded in the 16-bit tim-  
er). The reset value of both counters is also  
FFFCh in One Pulse mode and PWM mode.  
The timer clock depends on the clock control bits  
of the CR2 register, as illustrated in Table 1. The  
value in the counter register repeats every  
131.072, 262.144 or 524.288 CPU clock cycles  
depending on the CC[1:0] bits.  
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt  
Input capture functions with:  
– 2 dedicated 16-bit registers  
– 2 dedicated active edge selection signals  
– 2 dedicated status flags  
The timer frequency can be f  
or an external frequency.  
/2, f  
/4, f  
/8  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
– 1 dedicated maskable interrupt  
Pulse Width Modulation mode (PWM)  
One Pulse mode  
5 alternate functionson I/O ports (ICAP1, ICAP2,  
OCMP1, OCMP2, EXTCLK)*  
The Block Diagram is shown in Figure 1.  
*Note: Some timer pins may not be available (not  
bonded) in some ST7 devices. Refer to the device  
pin out description.  
When reading an input signal on a non-bonded  
pin, the value will always be ‘1’.  
51/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 30. Timer Block Diagram  
ST7 INTERNAL BUS  
f
CPU  
MCU-PERIPHERAL INTERFACE  
8 low  
8-bit  
8 high  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
buffer  
h
h
h
h
EXEDG  
g
w
g
w
g
w
g
low  
16  
INPUT  
CAPTURE  
REGISTER  
INPUT  
CAPTURE  
REGISTER  
OUTPUT  
COMPARE  
REGISTER  
OUTPUT  
COMPARE  
REGISTER  
1/2  
1/4  
1/8  
COUNTER  
REGISTER  
1
1
2
2
ALTERNATE  
COUNTER  
REGISTER  
EXTCLK  
pin  
16  
16  
16  
CC[1:0]  
TIMER INTERNAL BUS  
16 16  
OVERFLOW  
DETECT  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT1  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
CIRCUIT  
ICAP1  
pin  
CIRCUIT  
6
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT2  
ICAP2  
pin  
OCMP1  
pin  
LATCH1  
LATCH2  
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2  
0
0
0
OCMP2  
pin  
(Status Register) SR  
EXEDG  
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1  
OC1E  
OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2  
OC2E  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
(See note)  
Note: If IC, OC and TO interrupt requests have separate vectors  
then the last OR is not present (See device Interrupt Vector Table)  
TIMER INTERRUPT  
52/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
16-bit Read Sequence: (from either the Counter  
Register or the Alternate Counter Register).  
Clearing the overflow interrupt request is done in  
two steps:  
1. Reading the SR register while the TOF bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the CLR register.  
Beginning of the sequence  
Read  
LS Byte  
is buffered  
Note: The TOF bit is not cleared by accessing the  
ACLR register. The advantage of accessing the  
ACLR register rather than the CLR register is that  
it allows simultaneous use of the overflow function  
and reading the free running counter at random  
times (for example, to measure elapsed time) with-  
out the risk of clearing the TOF bit erroneously.  
MS Byte  
At t0  
Other  
instructions  
Returns the buffered  
LS Byte value at t0  
Read  
LS Byte  
At t0 +t  
The timer is not affected by WAIT mode.  
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until the  
mode is exited. Counting then resumes from the  
previous count (MCU awakened by an interrupt) or  
from the reset count (MCU awakened by a Reset).  
Sequence completed  
The user must read the MS Byte first, then the LS  
Byte value is buffered automatically.  
This buffered value remains unchanged until the  
16-bit read sequence is completed, even if the  
user reads the MS Byte several times.  
7.5.3.2 External Clock  
The external clock (where available) is selected if  
CC0=1 and CC1=1 in the CR2 register.  
After a complete reading sequence, if only the  
CLR register or ACLR register are read, they re-  
turn the LS Byte of the count value at the time of  
the read.  
The status of the EXEDG bit in the CR2 register  
determines the type of level transition on the exter-  
nal clock pin EXTCLK that will trigger the free run-  
ning counter.  
Whatever the timer mode used (input capture, out-  
put compare, One Pulse mode or PWM mode) an  
overflow occurs when the counter rolls over from  
FFFFh to 0000h then:  
The counter is synchronised with the falling edge  
of the internal CPU clock.  
A minimum of four falling edges of the CPU clock  
must occur between two consecutive active edges  
of the external clock; thus the external clock fre-  
quency must be less than a quarter of the CPU  
clock frequency.  
– The TOF bit of the SR register is set.  
– A timer interrupt is generated if:  
– TOIE bit of the CR1 register is set and  
– I bit of the CC register is cleared.  
If one of these conditions is false, the interrupt re-  
mains pending to be issued as soon as they are  
both true.  
53/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 31. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 2  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
FFFD FFFE FFFF 0000 0001 0002 0003  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Figure 32. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 4  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
FFFC  
FFFD  
0000  
0001  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Figure 33. Counter Timing Diagram, internal clock divided by 8  
CPU CLOCK  
INTERNAL RESET  
TIMER CLOCK  
0000  
FFFC  
FFFD  
COUNTER REGISTER  
TIMER OVERFLOW FLAG (TOF)  
Note: The MCU is in reset state when the internal reset signal is high. When it is low, the MCU is running.  
54/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.5.3.3 Input Capture  
When an input capture occurs:  
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because  
there are 2 input capture functions in the 16-bit  
timer.  
– The ICFi bit is set.  
– The ICiR register contains the value of the free  
running counter on the active transition on the  
ICAPi pin (see Figure 6).  
The two input capture 16-bit registers (IC1R and  
IC2R) are used to latch the value of the free run-  
ning counter after a transition is detected by the  
ICAPi pin (see figure 5).  
– A timer interrupt is generated if the ICIE bit is set  
and the I bit is cleared in the CC register. Other-  
wise, the interrupt remains pending until both  
conditions become true.  
MS Byte  
ICiHR  
LS Byte  
ICiLR  
ICiR  
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:  
The ICiR register is a read-only register.  
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.  
The active transition is software programmable  
through the IEDGi bit of Control Registers (CRi).  
Timing resolution is one count of the free running  
Notes:  
counter: (f  
/CC[1:0]).  
CPU  
1. After reading the ICiHR register, the transfer of  
input capture data is inhibited and ICFi will  
never be set until the ICiLR register is also  
read.  
Procedure:  
To use the input capture function, select the fol-  
lowing in the CR2 register:  
2. The ICiR register contains the free running  
counter value which corresponds to the most  
recent input capture.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 1).  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP2 pin with the IEDG2 bit (the ICAP2 pin  
must be configured as a floating input).  
3. The 2 input capture functions can be used  
together even if the timer also uses the 2 output  
compare functions.  
And select the following in the CR1 register:  
4. In One Pulse mode and PWM mode only the  
input capture 2 function can be used.  
– Set the ICIE bit to generate an interrupt after an  
input capture coming from either the ICAP1 pin  
or the ICAP2 pin  
5. The alternate inputs (ICAP1 & ICAP2) are  
always directly connected to the timer. So any  
transitions on these pins activate the input cap-  
ture function.  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1pin must  
be configured as a floating input).  
Moreover if one of the ICAPi pin is configured  
as an input and the second one as an output,  
an interrupt can be generated if the user tog-  
gles the output pin and if the ICIE bit is set.  
This can be avoided if the input capture func-  
tion i is disabled by reading the ICiHR (see note  
1).  
6. The TOF bit can be used with an interrupt in  
order to measure events that exceed the timer  
range (FFFFh).  
55/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 34. Input Capture Block Diagram  
ICAP1  
pin  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
IEDG1  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT2  
EDGE DETECT  
CIRCUIT1  
ICIE  
ICAP2  
pin  
(Status Register) SR  
ICF1  
ICF2  
0
0
0
IC2R Register  
IC1R Register  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
16-BIT  
16-BIT FREE RUNNING  
IEDG2  
CC0  
CC1  
COUNTER  
Figure 35. Input Capture Timing Diagram  
TIMER CLOCK  
FF01  
FF02  
FF03  
COUNTER REGISTER  
ICAPi PIN  
ICAPi FLAG  
FF03  
ICAPi REGISTER  
Note: Active edge is rising edge.  
56/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.5.3.4 Output Compare  
– The OCMPi pin takes OLVLi bit value (OCMPi  
pin latch is forced low during reset).  
In this section, the index, i, may be 1 or 2 because  
there are 2 output compare functions in the 16-bit  
timer.  
– A timer interrupt is generated if the OCIE bit is  
set in the CR2 register and the I bit is cleared in  
the CC register (CC).  
This function can be used to control an output  
waveform or indicate when a period of time has  
elapsed.  
The OCiR register value required for a specific tim-  
ing application can be calculated using the follow-  
ing formula:  
When a match is found between the Output Com-  
pare register and the free running counter, the out-  
put compare function:  
– Assigns pins with a programmable value if the  
OCIE bit is set  
t f  
* CPU  
PRESC  
OCiR =  
– Sets a flag in the status register  
– Generates an interrupt if enabled  
Where:  
t  
= Output compare period (in seconds)  
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
Two 16-bit registers Output Compare Register 1  
(OC1R) and Output Compare Register 2 (OC2R)  
contain the value to be compared to the counter  
register each timer clock cycle.  
f
CPU  
PRESC  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 de-  
pending on CC[1:0] bits, see Table 1)  
MS Byte  
OCiHR  
LS Byte  
OCiLR  
OCiR  
If the timer clock is an external clock, the formula  
is:  
These registers are readable and writable and are  
not affected by the timer hardware. A reset event  
changes the OCiR value to 8000h.  
OCiR = t f  
* EXT  
Where:  
Timing resolution is one count of the free running  
t  
= Output compare period (in seconds)  
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
counter: (f  
).  
CC[1:0]  
CPU/  
f
EXT  
Procedure:  
Clearing the output compare interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the OCFi bit) is done by:  
To use the output compare function, select the fol-  
lowing in the CR2 register:  
1. Reading the SR register while the OCFi bit is  
– Set the OCiE bit if an output is needed then the  
OCMPi pin is dedicated to the output compare i  
signal.  
set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the OCiLR register.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 1).  
And select the following in the CR1 register:  
The following procedure is recommended to pre-  
vent the OCFi bit from being set between the time  
it is read and the write to the OCiR register:  
– Select the OLVLi bit to applied to the OCMPi pins  
after the match occurs.  
– Write to the OCiHR register (further compares  
are inhibited).  
– Set the OCIE bit to generate an interrupt if it is  
needed.  
– Read the SR register (first step of the clearance  
of the OCFi bit, which may be already set).  
When a match is found between OCRi register  
and CR register:  
– Write to the OCiLR register (enables the output  
compare function and clears the OCFi bit).  
– OCFi bit is set.  
57/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Notes:  
Forced Compare Output capability  
1. After a processor write cycle to the OCiHR reg-  
ister, the output compare function is inhibited  
until the OCiLR register is also written.  
When the FOLVi bit is set by software, the OLVLi  
bit is copied to the OCMPi pin. The OLVi bit has to  
be toggled in order to toggle the OCMPi pin when  
it is enabled (OCiE bit=1). The OCFi bit is then not  
set by hardware, and thus no interrupt request is  
generated.  
2. If the OCiE bit is not set, the OCMPi pin is a  
general I/O port and the OLVLi bit will not  
appear when a match is found but an interrupt  
could be generated if the OCIE bit is set.  
FOLVLi bits have no effect in either One-Pulse  
mode or PWM mode.  
3. When the timer clock is f  
/2, OCFi and  
CPU  
OCMPi are set while the counter value equals  
the OCiR register value (see Figure 8). This  
behaviour is the same in OPM or PWM mode.  
When the timer clock is f  
/4, f  
/8 or in  
CPU  
CPU  
external clock mode, OCFi and OCMPi are set  
while the counter value equals the OCiR regis-  
ter value plus 1 (see Figure 9).  
4. The output compare functions can be used both  
for generating external events on the OCMPi  
pins even if the input capture mode is also  
used.  
5. The value in the 16-bit OCiR register and the  
OLVi bit should be changed after each suc-  
cessful comparison in order to control an output  
waveform or establish a new elapsed timeout.  
Figure 36. Output Compare Block Diagram  
16 BIT FREE RUNNING  
OC1E  
CC1 CC0  
OC2E  
COUNTER  
(Control Register 2) CR2  
16-bit  
(Control Register 1) CR1  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
CIRCUIT  
Latch  
1
FOLV2 FOLV1  
OCIE  
OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OCMP1  
Pin  
16-bit  
16-bit  
Latch  
2
OCMP2  
Pin  
OC1R Register  
OCF1  
OCF2  
0
0
0
OC2R Register  
(Status Register) SR  
58/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 37. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f  
=f  
/2  
CPU  
TIMER  
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK  
TIMER CLOCK  
COUNTER REGISTER  
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
2ED4  
2ED3  
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)  
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)  
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)  
Figure 38. Output Compare Timing Diagram, f  
=f  
/4  
CPU  
TIMER  
INTERNAL CPU CLOCK  
TIMER CLOCK  
2ECF 2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
2ED4  
2ED3  
COUNTER REGISTER  
OUTPUT COMPARE REGISTER i (OCRi)  
COMPARE REGISTER i LATCH  
OUTPUT COMPARE FLAG i (OCFi)  
OCMPi PIN (OLVLi=1)  
59/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.5.3.5 One Pulse Mode  
Clearing the Input Capture interrupt request (i.e.  
clearing the ICFi bit) is done in two steps:  
One Pulse mode enables the generation of a  
pulse when an external event occurs. This mode is  
selected via the OPM bit in the CR2 register.  
1. Reading the SR register while the ICFi bit is set.  
2. An access (read or write) to the ICiLR register.  
The One Pulse mode uses the Input Capture1  
function and the Output Compare1 function.  
The OC1R register value required for a specific  
timing application can be calculated using the fol-  
lowing formula:  
Procedure:  
t * f  
To use One Pulse mode:  
CPU  
- 5  
OCiR Value =  
1. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the length of the pulse (see the for-  
mula in the opposite column).  
PRESC  
Where:  
t
= Pulse period (in seconds)  
2. Select the following in the CR1 register:  
f
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
CPU  
PRESC  
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after the pulse.  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-  
ing on the CC[1:0] bits, see Table 1)  
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin during the pulse.  
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:  
OCiR = t f  
-5  
– Select the edge of the active transition on the  
ICAP1 pin with the IEDG1 bit (the ICAP1 pin  
must be configured as floating input).  
* EXT  
Where:  
t
= Pulse period (in seconds)  
3. Select the following in the CR2 register:  
f
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
EXT  
– Set the OC1E bit, the OCMP1 pin is then ded-  
icated to the Output Compare 1 function.  
– Set the OPM bit.  
When the value of the counter is equal to the value  
of the contents of the OC1R register, the OLVL1  
bit is output on the OCMP1 pin (see Figure 10).  
– Select the timer clock CC[1:0] (see Table 1).  
One Pulse mode cycle  
Notes:  
1. The OCF1 bit cannot be set by hardware in  
One Pulse mode but the OCF2 bit can generate  
an Output Compare interrupt.  
When  
OCMP1 = OLVL2  
event occurs  
on ICAP1  
Counter is reset  
2. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and  
One Pulse mode (OPM) bits are both set, the  
PWM mode is the only active one.  
to FFFCh  
ICF1 bit is set  
3. If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be  
seen on the OCMP1 pin.  
When  
Counter  
OCMP1 = OLVL1  
= OC1R  
4. The ICAP1 pin can not be used to perform input  
capture. The ICAP2 pin can be used to perform  
input capture (ICF2 can be set and IC2R can be  
loaded) but the user must take care that the  
counter is reset each time a valid edge occurs  
on the ICAP1 pin and ICF1 can also generates  
interrupt if ICIE is set.  
Then, on a valid event on the ICAP1 pin, the coun-  
ter is initialized to FFFCh and the OLVL2 bit is  
loaded on the OCMP1 pin, the ICF1 bit is set and  
the value FFFDh is loaded in the IC1R register.  
Because the ICF1 bit is set when an active edge  
occurs, an interrupt can be generated if the ICIE  
bit is set.  
5. When One Pulse mode is used OC1R is dedi-  
cated to this mode. Nevertheless OC2R and  
OCF2 can be used to indicate that a period of  
time has elapsed but cannot generate an output  
waveform because the OLVL2 level is dedi-  
cated to One Pulse mode.  
60/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
Figure 39. One Pulse Mode Timing Example  
FFFC FFFD FFFE  
COUNTER  
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
2ED3  
FFFC FFFD  
ICAP1  
OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OLVL2  
OCMP1  
compare1  
Note: IEDG1=1, OC1R=2ED0h, OLVL1=0, OLVL2=1  
Figure 40. Pulse Width Modulation Mode Timing Example  
2ED0 2ED1 2ED2  
34E2 FFFC  
FFFC FFFD FFFE  
34E2  
COUNTER  
OCMP1  
OLVL2  
OLVL1  
OLVL2  
compare2  
compare1  
compare2  
Note: OC1R=2ED0h, OC2R=34E2, OLVL1=0, OLVL2= 1  
61/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.5.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode  
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) mode enables the  
generation of a signal with a frequency and pulse  
length determined by the value of the OC1R and  
OC2R registers.  
The OCiR register value required for a specific tim-  
ing application can be calculated using the follow-  
ing formula:  
t * f  
CPU  
PRESC  
- 5  
OCiR Value =  
The Pulse Width Modulation mode uses the com-  
plete Output Compare 1 function plus the OC2R  
register, and so these functions cannot be used  
when the PWM mode is activated.  
Where:  
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)  
= CPU clock frequency (in hertz)  
f
Procedure  
CPU  
= Timer prescaler factor (2, 4 or 8 depend-  
ing on CC[1:0] bits, see Table 1)  
To use Pulse Width Modulation mode:  
PRESC  
1. Load the OC2R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the period of the signal using the  
formula in the opposite column.  
If the timer clock is an external clock the formula is:  
OCiR = t f  
-5  
* EXT  
2. Load the OC1R register with the value corre-  
sponding to the period of the pulse if OLVL1=0  
and OLVL2=1, using the formula in the oppo-  
site column.  
Where:  
t
= Signal or pulse period (in seconds)  
f
= External timer clock frequency (in hertz)  
EXT  
3. Select the following in the CR1 register:  
– Using the OLVL1 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful  
comparison with OC1R register.  
The Output Compare 2 event causes the counter  
to be initialized to FFFCh (See Figure 11)  
Notes:  
– Using the OLVL2 bit, select the level to be ap-  
plied to the OCMP1 pin after a successful  
comparison with OC2R register.  
1. After a write instruction to the OCiHR register,  
the output compare function is inhibited until the  
OCiLR register is also written.  
4. Select the following in the CR2 register:  
2. The OCF1 and OCF2 bits cannot be set by  
hardware in PWM mode, therefore the Output  
Compare interrupt is inhibited.  
– Set OC1E bit: the OCMP1 pin is then dedicat-  
ed to the output compare 1 function.  
– Set the PWM bit.  
3. The ICF1 bit is set by hardware when the coun-  
ter reaches the OC2R value and can produce a  
timer interrupt if the ICIE bit is set and the I bit is  
cleared.  
– Select the timer clock (CC[1:0]) (see Table 1).  
If OLVL1=1 and OLVL2=0, the length of the posi-  
tive pulse is the difference between the OC2R and  
OC1R registers.  
4. In PWM mode the ICAP1 pin can not be used  
to perform input capture because it is discon-  
nected from the timer. The ICAP2 pin can be  
used to perform input capture (ICF2 can be set  
and IC2R can be loaded) but the user must  
take care that the counter is reset after each  
period and ICF1 can also generate an interrupt  
if ICIE is set.  
If OLVL1=OLVL2 a continuous signal will be seen  
on the OCMP1 pin.  
Pulse Width Modulation cycle  
When  
Counter  
= OC1R  
OCMP1 = OLVL1  
5. When the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) and  
One Pulse mode (OPM) bits are both set, the  
PWM mode is the only active one.  
OCMP1 = OLVL2  
When  
Counter  
= OC2R  
Counter is reset  
to FFFCh  
ICF1 bit is set  
62/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.5.4 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on 16-bit Timer.  
Timer interrupts cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
WAIT  
HALT  
16-bit Timer registers are frozen.  
In HALT mode, the counter stops counting until Halt mode is exited. Counting resumes from the previous  
count when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability or from the counter  
reset value when the MCU is woken up by a RESET.  
If an input capture event occurs on the ICAPi pin, the input capture detection circuitry is armed. Consequent-  
ly, when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with “exit from HALT mode” capability, the ICFi bit is set, and  
the counter value present when exiting from HALT mode is captured into the ICiR register.  
7.5.5 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Input Capture 1 event/Counter reset in PWM mode  
Input Capture 2 event  
ICF1  
ICF2  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
ICIE  
Output Compare 1 event (not available in PWM mode)  
Output Compare 2 event (not available in PWM mode)  
Timer Overflow event  
OCF1  
OCF2  
TOF  
OCIE  
TOIE  
Note: The 16-bit Timer interrupt events are connected to the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chap-  
ter). These events generate an interrupt if the corresponding Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt  
mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).  
7.5.6 Summary of Timer modes  
AVAILABLE RESOURCES  
MODES  
Input Capture 1  
Input Capture 2  
Yes  
Output Compare 1 Output Compare 2  
Input Capture (1 and/or 2)  
Output Compare (1 and/or 2)  
One Pulse mode  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
1)  
3)  
2)  
Not Recommended  
Not Recommended  
Partially  
No  
PWM Mode  
No  
No  
1)  
2)  
3)  
See note 4 in Section 0.1.3.5 One Pulse Mode  
See note 5 in Section 0.1.3.5 One Pulse Mode  
See note 4 in Section 0.1.3.6 Pulse Width Modulation Mode  
63/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.5.7 Register Description  
Bit 4 = FOLV2 Forced Output Compare 2.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: No effect on the OCMP2 pin.  
1:Forces the OLVL2 bit to be copied to the  
OCMP2 pin, if the OC2E bit is set and even if  
there is no successful comparison.  
Each Timer is associated with three control and  
status registers, and with six pairs of data registers  
(16-bit values) relating to the two input captures,  
the two output compares, the counter and the al-  
ternate counter.  
Bit 3 = FOLV1 Forced Output Compare 1.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: No effect on the OCMP1 pin.  
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)  
Read/Write  
1: Forces OLVL1 to be copied to the OCMP1 pin, if  
the OC1E bit is set and even if there is no suc-  
cessful comparison.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
ICIE OCIE TOIE FOLV2 FOLV1 OLVL2 IEDG1 OLVL1  
Bit 2 = OLVL2 Output Level 2.  
This bit is copied to the OCMP2 pin whenever a  
successful comparison occurs with the OC2R reg-  
ister and OCxE is set in the CR2 register. This val-  
ue is copied to the OCMP1 pin in One Pulse mode  
and Pulse Width Modulation mode.  
Bit 7 = ICIE Input Capture Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the  
ICF1 or ICF2 bit of the SR register is set.  
Bit 1 = IEDG1 Input Edge 1.  
Bit 6 = OCIE Output Compare Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is generated whenever the  
OCF1 or OCF2 bit of the SR register is set.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the ICAP1 pin will trigger the capture.  
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.  
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.  
Bit 5 = TOIE Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited.  
1: A timer interrupt is enabled whenever the TOF  
bit of the SR register is set.  
Bit 0 = OLVL1 Output Level 1.  
The OLVL1 bit is copied to the OCMP1 pin when-  
ever a successful comparison occurs with the  
OC1R register and the OC1E bit is set in the CR2  
register.  
64/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)  
Read/Write  
Bit 4 = PWM Pulse Width Modulation.  
0: PWM mode is not active.  
1: PWM mode is active, the OCMP1 pin outputs a  
programmable cyclic signal; the length of the  
pulse depends on the value of OC1R register;  
the period depends on the value of OC2R regis-  
ter.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
OC1E OC2E OPM PWM CC1 CC0 IEDG2 EXEDG  
Bits 3:2 = CC[1:0] Clock Control.  
Bit 7 = OC1E Output Compare 1 Pin Enable.  
This bit is used only to output the signal from the  
timer on the OCMP1 pin (OLV1 in Output Com-  
pare mode, both OLV1 and OLV2 in PWM and  
one-pulse mode). Whatever the value of the OC1E  
bit, the internal Output Compare 1 function of the  
timer remains active.  
0: OCMP1 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin  
free for general-purpose I/O).  
1: OCMP1 pin alternate function enabled.  
The timer clock mode depends on these bits:  
Table 14. Clock Control Bits  
Timer Clock  
fCPU / 4  
CC1  
CC0  
0
0
1
0
1
0
fCPU / 2  
fCPU / 8  
External Clock (where  
available)  
1
1
Bit 6 = OC2E Output Compare 2 Pin Enable.  
This bit is used only to output the signal from the  
timer on the OCMP2 pin (OLV2 in Output Com-  
pare mode). Whatever the value of the OC2E bit,  
the internal Output Compare 2 function of the timer  
remains active.  
0: OCMP2 pin alternate function disabled (I/O pin  
free for general-purpose I/O).  
1: OCMP2 pin alternate function enabled.  
Note: If the external clock pin is not available, pro-  
gramming the external clock configuration stops  
the counter.  
Bit 1 = IEDG2 Input Edge 2.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the ICAP2 pin will trigger the capture.  
0: A falling edge triggers the capture.  
1: A rising edge triggers the capture.  
Bit 5 = OPM One Pulse mode.  
0: One Pulse mode is not active.  
Bit 0 = EXEDG External Clock Edge.  
1: One Pulse mode is active, the ICAP1 pin can be  
used to trigger one pulse on the OCMP1 pin; the  
active transition is given by the IEDG1 bit. The  
length of the generated pulse depends on the  
contents of the OC1R register.  
This bit determines which type of level transition  
on the external clock pin (EXTCLK) will trigger the  
counter register.  
0: A falling edge triggers the counter register.  
1: A rising edge triggers the counter register.  
65/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
STATUS REGISTER (SR)  
Read Only  
INPUT CAPTURE 1 HIGH REGISTER (IC1HR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
The three least significant bits are not used.  
7
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
high part of the counter value (transferred by the  
input capture 1 event).  
0
0
ICF1 OCF1 TOF ICF2 OCF2  
0
0
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 7 = ICF1 Input Capture Flag 1.  
0: No input capture (reset value).  
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP1 pin  
or the counter has reached the OC2R value in  
PWM mode. To clear this bit, first read the SR  
register, then read or write the low byte of the  
IC1R (IC1LR) register.  
INPUT CAPTURE 1 LOW REGISTER (IC1LR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
low part of the counter value (transferred by the in-  
put capture 1 event).  
Bit 6 = OCF1 Output Compare Flag 1.  
0: No match (reset value).  
1: The content of the free running counter matches  
the content of the OC1R register. To clear this  
bit, first read the SR register, then read or write  
the low byte of the OC1R (OC1LR) register.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 5 = TOF Timer Overflow Flag.  
0: No timer overflow (reset value).  
1: The free running counter has rolled over from  
FFFFh to 0000h. To clear this bit, first read the  
SR register, then read or write the low byte of  
the CR (CLR) register.  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC1HR)  
1
HIGH REGISTER  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.  
Note: Reading or writing the ACLR register does  
not clear TOF.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 4 = ICF2 Input Capture Flag 2.  
0: No input capture (reset value).  
1: An input capture has occurred on the ICAP2  
pin. To clear this bit, first read the SR register,  
then read or write the low byte of the IC2R  
(IC2LR) register.  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC1LR)  
1
LOW REGISTER  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Bit 3 = OCF2 Output Compare Flag 2.  
0: No match (reset value).  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the value to be compared to the CLR register.  
1: The content of the free running counter matches  
the content of the OC2R register. To clear this  
bit, first read the SR register, then read or write  
the low byte of the OC2R (OC2LR) register.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
Bit 2-0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.  
66/152  
ST72C171  
16-BIT TIMER (Cont’d)  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC2HR)  
2
HIGH REGISTER  
ALTERNATE COUNTER HIGH REGISTER  
(ACHR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 1000 0000 (80h)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the value to be compared to the CHR register.  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the counter value.  
7
0
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
MSB  
LSB  
OUTPUT COMPARE  
(OC2LR)  
2
LOW REGISTER  
ALTERNATE COUNTER LOW REGISTER  
(ACLR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the value to be compared to the CLR register.  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the counter value. A write to this register resets the  
counter. An access to this register after an access  
to SR register does not clear the TOF bit in SR  
register.  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
COUNTER HIGH REGISTER (CHR)  
MSB  
LSB  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1111 (FFh)  
INPUT CAPTURE 2 HIGH REGISTER (IC2HR)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the high part  
of the counter value.  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
7
0
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
high part of the counter value (transferred by the  
Input Capture 2 event).  
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
COUNTER LOW REGISTER (CLR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1111 1100 (FCh)  
This is an 8-bit register that contains the low part of  
the counter value. A write to this register resets the  
counter. An access to this register after accessing  
the SR register clears the TOF bit.  
INPUT CAPTURE 2 LOW REGISTER (IC2LR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: Undefined  
This is an 8-bit read only register that contains the  
low part of the counter value (transferred by the In-  
put Capture 2 event).  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
7
0
MSB  
LSB  
67/152  
ST72C171  
Table 15. 16-Bit Timer Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Name  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CR1  
ICIE  
0
OCIE  
0
TOIE  
0
FOLV2  
0
FOLV1  
0
OLVL2  
0
IEDG1  
0
OLVL1  
0
0032h  
0031h  
0033h  
Reset Value  
CR2  
OC1E  
0
OC2E  
0
OPM  
0
PWM  
0
CC1  
0
CC0  
0
IEDG2  
0
EXEDG  
0
Reset Value  
SR  
ICF1  
0
OCF1  
0
TOF  
0
ICF2  
0
OCF2  
0
-
-
-
Reset Value  
0
0
0
IC1HR  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reset Value  
0034h-  
0035h  
IC1LR  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Reset Value  
OC1HR  
MSB  
1
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
LSB  
0
Reset Value  
0036h-  
0037h  
OC1LR  
MSB  
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
LSB  
0
Reset Value  
OC2HR  
MSB  
1
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
LSB  
0
Reset Value  
003Eh-  
003Fh  
OC2LR  
MSB  
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
-
0
LSB  
0
Reset Value  
CHR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
Reset Value  
0038h-  
0039h  
CLR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
Reset Value  
ACHR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
1
Reset Value  
003Ah-  
003Bh  
ACLR  
MSB  
1
LSB  
0
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
1
-
0
-
Reset Value  
IC2HR  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
Reset Value  
003Ch-  
003Dh  
IC2LR  
MSB  
-
LSB  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reset Value  
68/152  
ST72C171  
7.6 PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (ART)  
7.6.1 Introduction  
The Pulse Width Modulated Auto-Reload Timer  
on-chip peripheral consists of an 8-bit auto reload  
counter with compare/capture capabilities and of a  
7-bit prescaler clock source.  
– Up to two input capture functions  
– External event detector  
– Up to two external interrupt sources  
The three first modes can be used together with a  
single counter frequency.  
These resources allow five possible operating  
modes:  
The timer can be used to wake up the MCU from  
WAIT and HALT modes.  
– Generation of up to 4 independent PWM signals  
– Output compare and Time base interrupt  
Figure 41. PWM Auto-Reload Timer Block Diagram  
OCRx  
DCRx  
OEx  
OPx  
PWMCR  
REGISTER  
REGISTER  
LOAD  
PORT  
ALTERNATE  
FUNCTION  
POLARITY  
CONTROL  
PWMx  
COMPARE  
8-BIT COUNTER  
(CAR REGISTER)  
ARR  
REGISTER  
LOAD  
INPUT CAPTURE  
CONTROL  
ICRx  
LOAD  
ARTICx  
REGISTER  
ICSx  
ICIEx  
ICFx  
ICCSR  
ICx INTERRUPT  
f
EXT  
ARTCLK  
f
COUNTER  
f
CPU  
MUX  
f
INPUT  
PROGRAMMABLE  
PRESCALER  
ARTCSR  
EXCL CC2  
CC1  
CC0  
TCE FCRL OIE  
OVF  
OVF INTERRUPT  
69/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.6.2 Functional Description  
Counter  
When TCE is set, the counter runs at the rate of  
the selected clock source.  
The free running 8-bit counter is fed by the output  
of the prescaler, and is incremented on every ris-  
ing edge of the clock signal.  
Counter and Prescaler Initialization  
After RESET, the counter and the prescaler are  
It is possible to read or write the contents of the  
counter on the fly by reading or writing the Counter  
Access register (CAR).  
cleared and f  
= f  
.
INPUT  
CPU  
The counter can be initialized by:  
– Writing to the ARR register and then setting the  
FCRL (Force Counter Re-Load) and the TCE  
(Timer Counter Enable) bits in the CSR register.  
When a counter overflow occurs, the counter is  
automatically reloaded with the contents of the  
ARR register (the prescaler is not affected).  
– Writing to the CAR counter access register,  
Counter clock and prescaler  
In both cases the 7-bit prescaler is also cleared,  
whereupon counting will start from a known value.  
The counter clock frequency is given by:  
CC[2:0]  
f
= f  
/ 2  
COUNTER  
INPUT  
Direct access to the prescaler is not possible.  
The timer counter’s input clock (f  
) feeds the  
INPUT  
Output compare control  
7-bit programmable prescaler, which selects one  
of the 8 available taps of the prescaler, as defined  
by CC[2:0] bits in the Control/Status Register  
(CSR). Thus the division factor of the prescaler  
The timer compare function is based on four differ-  
ent comparisons with the counter (one for each  
PWMx output). Each comparison is made be-  
tween the counter value and an output compare  
register (OCRx) value. This OCRx register can not  
be accessed directly, it is loaded from the duty cy-  
cle register (DCRx) at each overflow of the coun-  
ter.  
n
can be set to 2 (where n = 0, 1,..7).  
This f  
frequency source is selected through  
INPUT  
the EXCL bit of the CSR register and can be either  
the f or an external input frequency f  
.
EXT  
CPU  
The clock input to the counter is enabled by the  
TCE (Timer Counter Enable) bit in the CSR regis-  
ter. When TCE is reset, the counter is stopped and  
the prescaler and counter contents are frozen.  
This double buffering method avoids glitch gener-  
ation when changing the duty cycle on the fly.  
Figure 42. Output compare control  
fCOUNTER  
ARR=FDh  
FFh  
COUNTER  
OCRx  
FDh  
FEh  
FDh  
FEh  
FFh  
FDh  
FEh  
FFh  
FEh  
FDh  
DCRx  
FEh  
FDh  
PWMx  
70/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
Independent PWM signal generation  
OPx (output polarity) bit in the PWMCR register.  
When the counter reaches the value contained in  
one of the output compare register (OCRx) the  
corresponding PWMx pin level is restored.  
This mode allows up to four Pulse Width Modulat-  
ed signals to be generated on the PWMx output  
pins with minimum core processing overhead.  
This function is stopped during HALT mode.  
It should be noted that the reload values will also  
affect the value and the resolution of the duty cycle  
of the PWM output signal. To obtain a signal on a  
PWMx pin, the contents of the OCRx register must  
be greater than the contents of the ARR register.  
Each PWMx output signal can be selected inde-  
pendently using the corresponding OEx bit in the  
PWM Control register (PWMCR). When this bit is  
set, the corresponding I/O pin is configured as out-  
put push-pull alternate function.  
The maximum available resolution for the PWMx  
duty cycle is:  
The PWM signals all have the same frequency  
which is controlled by the counter period and the  
ARR register value.  
Resolution = 1 / (256 - ARR)  
Note: To get the maximum resolution (1/256), the  
ARR register must be 0. With this maximum reso-  
lution, 0% and 100% can be obtained by changing  
the polarity.  
f
= f  
/ (256 - ARR)  
PWM  
COUNTER  
When a counter overflow occurs, the PWMx pin  
level is changed depending on the corresponding  
Figure 43. PWM Auto-reload Timer Function  
255  
DUTY CYCLE  
REGISTER  
(DCRx)  
AUTO-RELOAD  
REGISTER  
(ARR)  
000  
t
WITH OEx=1  
AND OPx=0  
WITH OEx=1  
AND OPx=1  
Figure 44. PWM Signal from 0% to 100% Duty Cycle  
fCOUNTER  
ARR=FDh  
COUNTER  
FDh  
FEh  
FFh  
FDh  
FEh  
FFh  
FDh  
FEh  
OCRx=FCh  
OCRx=FDh  
OCRx=FEh  
OCRx=FFh  
t
71/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
Output compare and Time base interrupt  
External clock and event detector mode  
Using the f external prescaler input clock, the  
auto-reload timer can be used as an external clock  
event detector. In this mode, the ARR register is  
On overflow, the OVF flag of the CSR register is  
set and an overflow interrupt request is generated  
if the overflow interrupt enable bit, OIE, in the CSR  
register, is set. The OVF flag must be reset by the  
user software. This interrupt can be used as a time  
base in the application.  
EXT  
used to select the n  
counted before setting the OVF flag.  
number of events to be  
EVENT  
n
= 256 - ARR  
EVENT  
When entering HALT mode while f  
is selected,  
EXT  
all the timer control registers are frozen but the  
counter continues to increment. If the OIE bit is  
set, the next overflow of the counter will generate  
an interrupt which wakes up the MCU.  
Figure 45. External Event Detector Example (3 counts)  
fEXT=fCOUNTER  
ARR=FDh  
COUNTER  
FDh  
FEh  
FFh  
FDh  
FEh  
FFh  
FDh  
OVF  
CSR READ  
CSR READ  
INTERRUPT  
IF OIE=1  
INTERRUPT  
IF OIE=1  
t
72/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
Input capture function  
This mode allows the measurement of external  
signal pulse widths through ICRx registers.  
External interrupt capability  
This mode allows the Input capture capabilities to  
be used as external interrupt sources. The inter-  
rupts are generated on the edge of the ARTICx  
signal.  
Each input capture can generate an interrupt inde-  
pendently on a selected input signal transition.  
This event is flagged by a set of the corresponding  
CFx bits of the Input Capture Control/Status regis-  
ter (ICCSR).  
The edge sensitivity of the external interrupts is  
programmable (CSx bit of ICCSR register) and  
they are independently enabled through CIEx bits  
of the ICCSR register. After fetching the interrupt  
vector, the CFx flags can be read to identify the in-  
terrupt source.  
These input capture interrupts are enabled  
through the CIEx bits of the ICCSR register.  
The active transition (falling or rising edge) is soft-  
ware programmable through the CSx bits of the  
ICCSR register.  
During HALT mode, the external interrupts can be  
used to wake up the micro (if the CIEx bit is set).  
The read only input capture registers (ICRx) are  
used to latch the auto-reload counter value when a  
transition is detected on the ARTICx pin (CFx bit  
set in ICCSR register). After fetching the interrupt  
vector, the CFx flags can be read to identify the in-  
terrupt source.  
Note: After a capture detection, data transfer in  
the ICRx register is inhibited until it is read (clear-  
ing the CFx bit).  
The timer interrupt remains pending while the CFx  
flag is set when the interrupt is enabled (CIEx bit  
set). This means, the ICRx register has to be read  
at each capture event to clear the CFx flag.  
The timing resolution is given by auto-reload coun-  
ter cycle time (1/f  
).  
COUNTER  
Note: During HALT mode, if both input capture  
and external clock are enabled, the ICRx register  
value is not guaranteed if the input capture pin and  
the external clock change simultaneously.  
Figure 46. Input Capture Timing Diagram  
fCOUNTER  
COUNTER  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
INTERRUPT  
04h  
ARTICx PIN  
CFx FLAG  
xxh  
ICRx REGISTER  
t
73/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
7.6.3 Register Description  
CONTROL / STATUS REGISTER (CSR)  
Read/Write  
COUNTER ACCESS REGISTER (CAR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
7
0
EXCL CC2  
CC1  
CC0  
TCE FCRL  
OIE  
OVF  
CA7  
CA6  
CA5  
CA4  
CA3  
CA2  
CA1  
CA0  
Bit 7 = EXCLExternal Clock  
Bit 7:0 = CA[7:0] Counter Access Data  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It selects the  
input clock for the 7-bit prescaler.  
0: CPU clock.  
These bits can be set and cleared either by hard-  
ware or by software. The CAR register is used to  
read or write the auto-reload counter “on the fly”  
(while it is counting).  
1: External clock.  
Bit 6:4 = CC[2:0] Counter Clock Control  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
determine the prescaler division ratio from f  
.
INPUT  
AUTO-RELOAD REGISTER (ARR)  
Read/Write  
f
With f  
INPUT  
=8 MHz CC2 CC1 CC0  
COUNTER  
f
8 MHz  
4 MHz  
2 MHz  
1 MHz  
500 KHz  
250 KHz  
125 KHz  
62.5 KHz  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
INPUT  
f
f
f
/ 2  
/ 4  
/ 8  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
f
f
f
/ 16  
/ 32  
/ 64  
/ 128  
INPUT  
INPUT  
INPUT  
AR7  
AR6  
AR5  
AR4  
AR3  
AR2  
AR1  
AR0  
f
INPUT  
Bit 7:0 = AR[7:0]Counter Auto-Reload Data  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
are used to hold the auto-reload value which is au-  
tomatically loaded in the counter when an overflow  
occurs. At the same time, the PWM output levels  
are changed according to the corresponding OPx  
bit in the PWMCR register.  
Bit 3 = TCE Timer Counter Enable  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It puts the  
timer in the lowest power consumption mode.  
0: Counter stopped (prescaler and counter frozen).  
1: Counter running.  
Bit 2 = FCRLForce Counter Re-Load  
This register has two PWM management func-  
tions:  
This bit is write-only and any attempt to read it will  
yielda logicalzero. When set, itcausesthecontents  
of ARR register to be loaded into the counter, and  
the content of the prescaler register to be cleared in  
order to initialize the timer before starting to count.  
– Adjusting the PWM frequency  
– Setting the PWM duty cycle resolution  
PWM Frequency vs. Resolution:  
Bit 1 = OIEOverflow Interrupt Enable  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It allows to  
enable/disable the interrupt which is generated  
when the OVF bit is set.  
f
PWM  
ARR value Resolution  
Min  
Max  
0
8-bit  
~0.244-KHz 31.25-KHz  
0: Overflow Interrupt disable.  
1: Overflow Interrupt enable.  
[ 0..127 ]  
> 7-bit  
> 6-bit  
> 5-bit  
> 4-bit  
~0.244-KHz  
~0.488-KHz  
~0.977-KHz  
~1.953-KHz  
62.5-KHz  
125-KHz  
250-KHz  
500-KHz  
[ 128..191 ]  
[ 192..223 ]  
[ 224..239 ]  
Bit 0 = OVFOverflow Flag  
This bit is set by hardware and cleared by software  
reading the CSR register. It indicates the transition  
of the counter from FFh to the ARR value  
0: New transition not yet reached  
1: Transition reached  
.
74/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
PWM CONTROL REGISTER (PWMCR)  
Read/Write  
DUTY CYCLE REGISTERS (DCRx)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
7
0
0
0
OE1  
OE0  
0
0
OP1  
OP0  
DC7  
DC6  
DC5  
DC4  
DC3  
DC2  
DC1  
DC0  
Bit 7:6 = Reserved.  
Bit 5:4 = OE[1:0] PWM Output Enable  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
enable or disable the PWM output channels inde-  
pendently acting on the corresponding I/O pin.  
0: PWM output disabled.  
Bit 7:0 = DC[7:0] Duty Cycle Data  
These bits are set and cleared by software.  
A DCRx register is associated with the OCRx reg-  
ister of each PWM channel to determine the sec-  
ond edge location of the PWM signal (the first  
edge location is common to all channels and given  
by the ARR register). These DCR registers allow  
the duty cycle to be set independently for each  
PWM channel.  
1: PWM output enabled.  
Bit 3:2 = Reserved.  
Bit 1:0 = OP[1:0] PWM Output Polarity  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
independently select the polarity of the two PWM  
output signals.  
PWMx output level  
OPx  
Counter <= OCRx  
Counter > OCRx  
1
0
0
1
0
1
Note: When an OPx bit is modified, the PWMx out-  
put signal polarity is immediately reversed.  
75/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
INPUT CAPTURE  
CONTROL / STATUS REGISTER (ICCSR)  
INPUT CAPTURE REGISTERS (ICRx)  
Read only  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
7
0
IC7  
IC6  
IC5  
IC4  
IC3  
IC2  
IC1  
IC0  
0
0
CS2  
CS1  
CIE2 CIE1  
CF2  
CF1  
Bit 7:0 = IC[7:0] Input Capture Data  
Bit 7:6 = Reserved, always read as 0.  
These read only bits are set and cleared by hard-  
ware. An ICRx register contains the 8-bit auto-re-  
load counter value transferred by the input capture  
channel x event.  
Bit 5:4 = CS[2:1] Capture Sensitivity  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
determine the trigger event polarity on the corre-  
sponding input capture channel.  
0: Falling edge triggers capture on channel x.  
1: Rising edge triggers capture on channel x.  
Bit 3:2 = CIE[2:1] Capture Interrupt Enable  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
allow to enable or not the Input capture channel in-  
terrupts independently.  
0: Input capture channel x interrupt disabled.  
1: Input capture channel x interrupt enabled.  
Bit 1:0 = CF[2:1] Capture Flag  
These bits are set by hardware and cleared by  
software reading the corresponding ICRx register.  
Each CFx bit indicates that an input capture x has  
occurred.  
0: No input capture on channel x.  
1: An input capture has occured on channel x.  
76/152  
ST72C171  
PWM AUTO-RELOAD TIMER (Cont’d)  
Table 16. PWM Auto-Reload Timer Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Label  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PWMDCR1  
Reset Value  
DC7  
0
DC6  
0
DC5  
0
DC4  
0
DC3  
0
DC2  
0
DC1  
0
DC0  
0
0074h  
0075h  
0076h  
0077h  
0078h  
0079h  
007Ah  
007Bh  
PWMDCR0  
Reset Value  
DC7  
0
DC6  
0
DC5  
0
DC4  
0
DC3  
0
DC2  
0
DC1  
0
DC0  
0
PWMCR  
0
0
0
0
OE1  
0
OE0  
0
0
0
0
0
OP1  
0
OP0  
0
Reset Value  
ARTCSR  
EXCL  
0
CC2  
0
CC1  
0
CC0  
0
TCE  
0
FCRL  
0
RIE  
0
OVF  
0
Reset Value  
ARTCAR  
CA7  
0
CA6  
0
CA5  
0
CA4  
0
CA3  
0
CA2  
0
CA1  
0
CA0  
0
Reset Value  
ARTARR  
AR7  
0
AR6  
0
AR5  
0
AR4  
0
AR3  
0
AR2  
0
AR1  
0
AR0  
0
Reset Value  
ARTICCSR  
Reset Value  
CE2  
0
CE1  
0
CS2  
0
CS1  
0
CF2  
0
CF1  
0
0
0
ARTICR1  
IC7  
0
IC6  
0
IC5  
0
IC4  
0
IC3  
0
IC2  
0
IC1  
0
IC0  
0
Reset Value  
77/152  
ST72C171  
7.7 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI)  
7.7.1 Introduction  
7.7.3 General Description  
The Serial Communications Interface (SCI) offers  
a flexible means of full-duplex data exchange with  
external equipment requiring an industry standard  
NRZ asynchronous serial data format.  
The interface is externally connected to another  
device by two pins (see Figure 47):  
– TDO: Transmit Data Output. When the transmit-  
ter is disabled, the output pin returns to its I/O  
port configuration. When the transmitter is ena-  
bled and nothing is to be transmitted, the TDO  
pin is at high level.  
7.7.2 Main Features  
Full duplex, asynchronous communications  
NRZ standard format (Mark/Space)  
– RDI: Receive Data Input is the serial data input.  
Oversampling techniques are used for data re-  
covery by discriminating between valid incoming  
data and noise.  
Independently programmable transmit and  
receive baud rates up to 250K baud.  
Programmable data word length (8 or 9 bits)  
Receive buffer full, Transmit buffer empty and  
Through this pins, serial data is transmitted and re-  
ceived as frames comprising:  
End of Transmission flags  
Two receiver wake-up modes:  
– Address bit (MSB)  
– An Idle Line prior to transmission or reception  
– A start bit  
– Idle line  
– A data word (8 or 9 bits) least significant bit first  
– A Stop bit indicating that the frame is complete.  
Mutingfunctionformultiprocessorconfigurations  
Separate enable bits for Transmitter and  
Receiver  
Three error detection flags:  
– Overrun error  
– Noise error  
– Frame error  
Five interrupt sources with flags:  
– Transmit data register empty  
– Transmission complete  
– Receive data register full  
– Idle line received  
– Overrun error detected  
78/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Figure 47. SCI Block Diagram  
Write  
Read  
(Data Register) DR  
Received Data Register (RDR)  
Received Shift Register  
Transmit Data Register (TDR)  
TDO  
Transmit Shift Register  
RDI  
CR1  
R8  
-
T8  
-
M
WAKE  
-
-
WAKE  
TRANSMIT  
UP  
RECEIVER  
CLOCK  
RECEIVER  
CONTROL  
CONTROL  
UNIT  
CR2  
SR  
TIE TCIE RIE ILIE TE RE RWU SBK  
TDRE TC RDRF  
IDLE OR NF FE  
-
SCI  
INTERRUPT  
CONTROL  
TRANSMITTER  
CLOCK  
Transmitter Rate  
Control  
f
CPU  
/PR  
/2  
/16  
BRR  
SCP1  
SCT2  
SCT1SCT0SCR2 SCR1SCR0  
SCP0  
Receiver Rate  
Control  
BAUD RATE GENERATOR  
79/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.7.4 Functional Description  
The TDO pin is in low state during the start bit.  
The TDO pin is in high state during the stop bit.  
The block diagram of the Serial Control Interface,  
is shown in Figure 47. It contains 4 dedicated reg-  
isters:  
An Idle character is interpreted as an entire frame  
of “1”s followed by the start bit of the next frame  
which contains data.  
– Two control registers (CR1 & CR2)  
– A status register (SR)  
A Break character is interpreted on receiving “0”s  
for some multiple of the frame period. At the end of  
the last break frame the transmitter inserts an ex-  
tra “1” bit to acknowledge the start bit.  
– A baud rate register (BRR)  
Refer to the register descriptions in Section 9.7.7  
for the definitions of each bit.  
Transmission and reception are driven by their  
own baud rate generator.  
7.7.4.1 Serial Data Format  
Word length may be selected as being either 8 or 9  
bits by programming the M bit in the CR1 register  
(see Figure 47).  
Figure 48. Word Length Programming  
9-bit Word length (M bit is set)  
Possible  
Next Data Frame  
Parity  
Data Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Next  
Start  
Bit  
Stop  
Bit  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit3  
Bit5  
Bit6  
Bit8  
Bit0  
Bit4  
Bit7  
Bit  
Start  
Bit  
Idle Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Extra  
’1’  
Break Frame  
8-bit Word length (M bit is reset)  
Possible  
Parity  
Next Data Frame  
Data Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Next  
Start  
Bit  
Stop  
Bit  
Bit2  
Bit1  
Bit3  
Bit5  
Bit6  
Bit0  
Bit4  
Bit7  
Bit  
Start  
Bit  
Idle Frame  
Start  
Bit  
Extra  
’1’  
Break Frame  
80/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.7.4.2 Transmitter  
When a frame transmission is complete (after the  
stop bit or after the break frame) the TC bit is set  
and an interrupt is generated if the TCIE is set and  
the I bit is cleared in the CC register.  
The transmitter can send data words of either 8 or  
9 bits depending on the M bit status. When the M  
bit is set, word length is 9 bits and the 9th bit (the  
MSB) has to be stored in the T8 bit in the CR1 reg-  
ister.  
The following software sequence is always to clear  
the TC bit:  
1. An access to the SR register  
Character Transmission  
2. A write to the DR register  
During an SCI transmission, data shifts out least  
significant bit first on the TDO pin. In this mode,  
the DR register consists of a buffer (TDR) between  
the internal bus and the transmit shift register (see  
Figure 47).  
Note: The TDRE and TC bits are cleared by the  
same software sequence.  
Break Characters  
Setting the SBK bit loads the shift register with a  
break character. The break frame length depends  
on the M bit (see Figure 48).  
Procedure  
– Select the M bit to define the word length.  
As long as the SBK bit is set, the SCI sends break  
frames to the TDO pin. After clearing this bit by  
software, the SCI inserts a logic 1 bit at the end of  
the last break frame to guarantee the recognition  
of the start bit of the next frame.  
– Select the desired baud rate using the BRR reg-  
ister.  
– Set the TE bit to assign the TDO pin to the alter-  
nate function and to send a idle frame as first  
transmission.  
Idle Characters  
– Access the SR register and write the data to  
send in the DR register (this sequence clears the  
TDRE bit). Repeat this sequence for each data to  
be transmitted.  
Setting the TE bit drives the SCI to send an idle  
frame before the first data frame.  
Clearing and then setting the TE bit during a trans-  
mission sends an idle frame after the current word.  
The following software sequence is always to clear  
the TDRE bit:  
1. An access to the SR register  
2. A write to the DR register  
Note: Resetting and setting the TE bit causes the  
data in the TDR register to be lost. Therefore the  
best time to toggle the TE bit is when the TDRE bit  
is set, i.e. before writing the next byte in the DR.  
The TDRE bit is set by hardware and it indicates  
that:  
– The TDR register is empty.  
– The data transfer is beginning.  
– The next data can be written in the DR register  
without overwriting the previous data.  
This flag generates an interrupt if the TIE bit is set  
and the I bit is cleared in the CC register.  
When a transmission is taking place, a write in-  
struction to the DR register stores the data in the  
TDR register which is copied in the shift register at  
the end of the current transmission.  
When no transmission is taking place, a write in-  
struction to the DR register places the data directly  
in the shift register, the data transmission starts,  
and the TDRE bit is immediately set.  
81/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.7.4.3 Receiver  
Overrun Error  
An overrun error occurs when a character is re-  
ceived when RDRF has not been reset. Data can  
not be transferred from the shift register to the  
TDR register as long as the RDRF bit is not  
cleared.  
The SCI can receive data words of either 8 or 9  
bits. When the M bit is set, word length is 9 bits  
and the MSB is stored in the R8 bit in the CR1 reg-  
ister.  
Character reception  
When a overrun error occurs:  
– The OR bit is set.  
During a SCI reception, data shifts in least signifi-  
cant bit first through the RDI pin. In this mode, the  
DR register consists of a buffer (RDR) between  
the internal bus and the received shift register (see  
Figure 47).  
– The RDR content will not be lost.  
– The shift register will be overwritten.  
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and  
the I bit is cleared in the CC register.  
Procedure  
– Select the M bit to define the word length.  
The OR bit is reset by an access to the SR register  
followed by a DR register read operation.  
– Select the desired baud rate using the BRR reg-  
ister.  
Noise Error  
– Set the RE bit to enable the receiverto begin  
searching for a start bit.  
Oversampling techniques are used for data recov-  
ery by discriminating between valid incoming data  
and noise.  
When a character is received:  
– The RDRF bit is set. It indicates that the content  
of the shift register is transferred to the RDR.  
When noise is detected in a frame:  
– The NF is set at the rising edge of the RDRF bit.  
– An interrupt is generated if the RIE bit is set and  
the I bit is cleared in the CC register.  
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the  
DR register.  
– The error flags can be set if a frame error, noise  
or an overrun error has been detected during re-  
ception.  
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises  
at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself  
generates an interrupt.  
Clearing the RDRF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence done by:  
The NF bit is reset by a SR register read operation  
followed by a DR register read operation.  
1. An access to the SR register  
2. A read to the DR register.  
Framing Error  
A framing error is detected when:  
The RDRF bit must be cleared before the end of the  
reception of the next character to avoid an overrun  
error.  
– The stop bit is not recognized on reception at the  
expected time, following either a de-synchroni-  
zation or excessive noise.  
Break Character  
– A break is received.  
When a break character is received, the SCI han-  
dles it as a framing error.  
When the framing error is detected:  
– The FE bit is set by hardware  
Idle Character  
– Data is transferred from the Shift register to the  
DR register.  
When a idle frame is detected, there is the same  
procedure as a data received character plus an in-  
terrupt if the ILIE bit is set and the I bit is cleared in  
the CC register.  
– No interrupt is generated. However this bit rises  
at the same time as the RDRF bit which itself  
generates an interrupt.  
The FE bit is reset by a SR register read operation  
followed by a DR register read operation.  
82/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.7.4.4 Baud Rate Generation  
should actively receive the full message contents,  
thus reducing redundant SCI service overhead for  
all non addressed receivers.  
The baud rates for the receiver and transmitter (Rx  
and Tx) are set independently and calculated as  
follows:  
The non addressed devices may be placed in  
sleep mode by means of the muting function.  
f
f
CPU  
CPU  
Setting the RWU bit by software puts the SCI in  
sleep mode:  
Rx =  
Tx =  
(32 PR) RR  
(32 PR) TR  
*
*
*
*
All the reception status bits can not be set.  
All the receive interrupt are inhibited.  
with:  
PR = 1, 3, 4 or 13 (see SCP0 & SCP1 bits)  
TR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128  
A muted receiver may be awakened by one of the  
following two ways:  
(see SCT0, SCT1 & SCT2 bits)  
RR = 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64,128  
– by Idle Line detection if the WAKE bit is reset,  
– by Address Mark detection if the WAKE bit is set.  
(see SCR0,SCR1 & SCR2 bits)  
All these bits are in the BRR register.  
The Receiver wakes-up by Idle Line detection  
when the Receive line has recognised an Idle  
Frame. Then the RWU bit is reset by hardware but  
the IDLE bit is not set.  
Example: If f  
is 8 MHz and if PR=13 and  
CPU  
TR=RR=1, the transmit and receive baud rates are  
19200 bauds.  
The Receiver wakes-up by Address Mark detec-  
tion when it received a “1” as the most significant  
bit of a word, thus indicating that the message is  
an address. The reception of this particular word  
wakes up the receiver, resets the RWU bit and  
sets the RDRF bit, which allows the receiver to re-  
ceive this word normally and to use it as an ad-  
dress word.  
Note: The baud rate registers MUST NOT be  
changed while the transmitter or the receiver is en-  
abled.  
7.7.4.5 Receiver Muting and Wake-up Feature  
In multiprocessor configurations it is often desira-  
ble that only the intended message recipient  
83/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.7.5 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on SCI.  
WAIT  
SCI interrupts exit from Wait mode.  
SCI registers are frozen.  
HALT  
In Halt mode, the SCI stops transmitting/receiving until Halt mode is exited.  
7.7.6 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Transmit Data Register Empty  
Transmission Complete  
TDRE  
TC  
TIE  
No  
No  
No  
No  
No  
TCIE  
Received Data Ready to be Read  
Overrrun Error Detected  
Idle Line Detected  
RDRF  
OR  
RIE  
ILIE  
IDLE  
The SCI interrupt events are connected to the  
same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).  
rupt mask in the CC register is reset (RIM instruc-  
tion).  
These events generate an interrupt if the corre-  
sponding Enable Control Bit is set and the inter-  
84/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.7.7 Register Description  
Note: The IDLE bit will not be set again until the  
RDRF bit has been set itself (i.e. a new idle line oc-  
curs). This bit is not set by an idle line when the re-  
ceiver wakes up from wake-up mode.  
STATUS REGISTER (SR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 1100 0000 (C0h)  
Bit 3 = OR Overrun error.  
7
0
0
This bit is set by hardware when the word currently  
being received in the shift register is ready to be  
transferred into the RDR register while RDRF=1.  
An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the CR2 reg-  
ister. It is cleared by hardware when RE=0 by a  
software sequence (an access to the SR register  
followed by a read to the DR register).  
0: No Overrun error  
TDRE  
TC  
RDRF IDLE  
OR  
NF  
FE  
Bit 7 = TDRE Transmit data register empty.  
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the  
TDR register has been transferred into the shift  
register. An interrupt is generated if TIE =1 in the  
CR2 register. It is cleared by a software sequence  
(an access to the SR register followed by a write to  
the DR register).  
1: Overrun error is detected  
Note: When this bit is set the RDR register content  
will not be lost but the shift register will be overwrit-  
ten.  
0: Data is not transferred to the shift register  
1: Data is transferred to the shift register  
Note: data will not be transferred to the shift regis-  
ter as long as the TDRE bit is not reset.  
Bit 2 = NF Noise flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when noise is detected  
on a received frame. It is cleared by hardware  
when RE=0 by a software sequence (an access to  
the SR register followed by a read to the DR regis-  
ter).  
0: No noise is detected  
1: Noise is detected  
Bit 6 = TC Transmission complete.  
This bit is set by hardware when transmission of a  
frame containing Data, a Preamble or a Break is  
complete. An interrupt is generated if TCIE=1 in  
the CR2 register. It is cleared by a software se-  
quence (an access to the SR register followed by a  
write to the DR register).  
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it ap-  
pears at the same time as the RDRF bit which it-  
self generates an interrupt.  
0: Transmission is not complete  
1: Transmission is complete  
Bit 1 = FE Framing error.  
Bit 5 = RDRF Received data ready flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when a de-synchroniza-  
tion, excessive noise or a break character is de-  
tected. It is cleared by hardware when RE=0 by a  
software sequence (an access to the SR register  
followed by a read to the DR register).  
0: No Framing error is detected  
1: Framing error or break character is detected  
This bit is set by hardware when the content of the  
RDR register has been transferred into the DR  
register. An interrupt is generated if RIE=1 in the  
CR2 register. It is cleared by hardware when  
RE=0 or by a software sequence (an access to the  
SR register followed by a read to the DR register).  
0: Data is not received  
Note: This bit does not generate interrupt as it ap-  
pears at the same time as the RDRF bit which it-  
self generates an interrupt. If the word currently  
being transferred causes both frame error and  
overrun error, it will be transferred and only the OR  
bit will be set.  
1: Received data is ready to be read  
Bit 4 = IDLE Idle line detect.  
This bit is set by hardware when an Idle Line is de-  
tected. An interrupt is generated if ILIE=1 in the  
CR2 register. It is cleared by hardware when  
RE=0 by a software sequence (an access to the  
SR register followed by a read to the DR register).  
0: No Idle Line is detected  
Bit 0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.  
1: Idle Line is detected  
85/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
CONTROL REGISTER 1 (CR1)  
Read/Write  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever TC=1 in  
the SR register  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Bit 5 = RIE Receiver interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever OR=1  
or RDRF=1 in the SR register  
7
0
R8  
T8  
0
M
WAKE  
0
0
0
Bit 7 = R8 Receive data bit 8.  
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the received  
word when M=1.  
Bit 4 = ILIE Idle line interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever IDLE=1  
in the SR register.  
Bit 6 = T8 Transmit data bit 8.  
This bit is used to store the 9th bit of the transmit-  
ted word when M=1.  
Bit 3 = TE Transmitter enable.  
This bit enables the transmitter and assigns the  
TDO pin to the alternate function. It is set and  
cleared by software.  
Bit 5 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.  
0: Transmitter is disabled, the TDO pin is back to  
the I/O port configuration.  
1: Transmitter is enabled  
Bit 4 = M Word length.  
This bit determines the data length. It is set or  
cleared by software.  
0: 1 Start bit, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit  
1: 1 Start bit, 9 Data bits, 1 Stop bit  
Note: During transmission, a “0” pulse on the TE  
bit (“0” followed by “1”) sends a preamble after the  
current word.  
Bit 3 = WAKE Wake-Up method.  
This bit determines the SCI Wake-Up method, it is  
set or cleared by software.  
0: Idle Line  
Bit 2 = RE Receiver enable.  
This bit enables the receiver. It is set and cleared  
by software.  
0: Receiver is disabled, it resets the RDRF, IDLE,  
OR, NF and FE bits of the SR register.  
1: Receiver is enabled and begins searching for a  
start bit.  
1: Address Mark  
Bit 2:0 = Reserved, forced by hardware to 0.  
Bit 1 = RWU Receiver wake-up.  
CONTROL REGISTER 2 (CR2)  
Read/Write  
This bit determines if the SCI is in mute mode or  
not. It is set and cleared by software and can be  
cleared by hardware when a wake-up sequence is  
recognized.  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
0: Receiver in active mode  
1: Receiver in mute mode  
TIE  
TCIE  
RIE  
ILIE  
TE  
RE  
RWU  
SBK  
Bit 0 = SBK Send break.  
This bit set is used to send break characters. It is  
set and cleared by software.  
0: No break character is transmitted  
1: Break characters are transmitted  
Bit 7 = TIE Transmitter interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SCI interrupt is generated whenever  
TDRE=1 in the SR register.  
Note: If the SBK bit is set to “1” and then to “0”, the  
transmitter will send a BREAK word at the end of  
the current word.  
Bit 6 = TCIE Transmission complete interrupt ena-  
ble  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
86/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
DATA REGISTER (DR)  
Bit 5:3 = SCT[2:0] SCI Transmitter rate divisor  
Read/Write  
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0  
bits, define the total division applied to the bus  
clock to yield the transmit rate clock in convention-  
al Baud Rate Generator mode.  
Reset Value: Undefined  
Contains the Received or Transmitted data char-  
acter, depending on whether it is read from or writ-  
ten to.  
TR dividing factor  
SCT2  
SCT1  
SCT0  
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
7
0
4
DR7  
DR6  
DR5  
DR4  
DR3  
DR2  
DR1  
DR0  
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
The Data register performs a double function (read  
and write) since it is composed of two registers,  
one for transmission (TDR) and one for reception  
(RDR).  
The TDR register provides the parallel interface  
between the internal bus and the output shift reg-  
ister (see Figure 47).  
The RDR register provides the parallel interface  
between the input shift register and the internal  
bus (see Figure 47).  
Bit 2:0 = SCR[2:0] SCI Receiver rate divisor.  
These 3 bits, in conjunction with the SCP1 & SCP0  
bits, define the total division applied to the bus  
clock to yield the receive rate clock in conventional  
Baud Rate Generator mode.  
BAUD RATE REGISTER (BRR)  
Read/Write  
RR dividing factor  
SCR2  
SCR1  
SCR0  
Reset Value: 00xx xxxx (XXh)  
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
7
0
4
SCP1 SCP0 SCT2 SCT1 SCT0 SCR2 SCR1 SCR0  
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
Bit 7:6= SCP[1:0] First SCI Prescaler  
These 2 prescaling bits allow several standard  
clock division ranges:  
PR Prescaling factor  
SCP1  
SCP0  
1
3
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
4
13  
87/152  
ST72C171  
Table 17. SCI Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Name  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SR  
D7  
D6  
D5  
-
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
0050h  
0051h  
0052h  
0053h  
0054h  
Reset Value  
DR  
-
SPIE  
0
-
SPE  
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
MSTR  
CPOL  
CPHA  
SPR1  
SPR0  
Reset Value  
BRR  
0
-
0
x
x
x
x
SPIF  
0
WCOL  
0
MODF  
-
-
-
-
Reset Value  
CR1  
0
D5  
-
0
0
0
0
0
D7  
-
D6  
-
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Reset Value  
CR2  
-
MSTR  
0
-
CPOL  
x
-
CPHA  
x
-
SPR1  
x
-
SPR0  
x
SPIE  
0
SPE  
0
-
Reset Value  
0
88/152  
ST72C171  
7.8 SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI)  
7.8.1 Introduction  
7.8.3 General description  
The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) allows full-  
duplex, synchronous, serial communication with  
external devices. An SPI system may consist of a  
master and one or more slaves or a system in  
which devices may be either masters or slaves.  
The SPI is connected to external devices through  
4 alternate pins:  
– MISO: Master In Slave Out pin  
– MOSI: Master Out Slave In pin  
– SCK: Serial Clock pin  
The SPI is normally used for communication be-  
tween the microcontroller and external peripherals  
or another microcontroller.  
– SS: Slave select pin  
Refer to the Pin Description chapter for the device-  
specific pin-out.  
A basic example of interconnections between a  
single master and a single slave is illustrated on  
Figure 49.  
7.8.2 Main Features  
The MOSI pins are connected together as are  
MISO pins. In this way data is transferred serially  
between master and slave (most significant bit  
first).  
Full duplex, three-wire synchronous transfers  
Master or slave operation  
Four master mode frequencies  
Maximum slave mode frequency = fCPU/2.  
Four programmable master bit rates  
Programmable clock polarity and phase  
End of transfer interrupt flag  
When the master device transmits data to a slave  
device via MOSI pin, the slave device responds by  
sending data to the master device via the MISO  
pin. This implies full duplex transmission with both  
data out and data in synchronized with the same  
clock signal (which is provided by the master de-  
vice via the SCK pin).  
Write collision flag protection  
Master mode fault protection capability.  
Thus, the byte transmitted is replaced by the byte  
received and eliminates the need for separate  
transmit-empty and receiver-full bits. A status flag  
is used to indicate that the I/O operation is com-  
plete.  
Four possible data/clock timing relationships may  
be chosen (see Figure 52) but master and slave  
must be programmed with the same timing mode.  
Figure 49. Serial Peripheral Interface Master/Slave  
MASTER  
SLAVE  
MSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit  
LSBit  
MISO  
MOSI  
MISO  
MOSI  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
8-BIT SHIFT REGISTER  
SPI  
CLOCK  
SCK  
SCK  
GENERATOR  
SS  
SS  
+5V  
89/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Figure 50. Serial Peripheral Interface Block Diagram  
Internal Bus  
Read  
DR  
IT  
Read Buffer  
request  
MOSI  
SR  
MISO  
8-Bit Shift Register  
Write  
MODF  
WCOL  
SPIF  
-
-
-
-
-
SPI  
STATE  
CONTROL  
SCK  
SS  
CR  
SPIE SPE SPR2 MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0  
MASTER  
CONTROL  
SERIAL  
CLOCK  
GENERATOR  
90/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.4 Functional Description  
In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data output  
and to the MISO pin is a data input.  
Figure 49 shows the serial peripheral interface  
(SPI) block diagram.  
This interface contains 3 dedicated registers:  
– A Control Register (CR)  
Transmit sequence  
The transmit sequence begins when a byte is writ-  
ten the DR register.  
– A Status Register (SR)  
The data byte is parallel loaded into the 8-bit shift  
register (from the internal bus) during a write cycle  
and then shifted out serially to the MOSI pin most  
significant bit first.  
– A Data Register (DR)  
Refer to the CR, SR and DR registers in Section  
9.8.7for the bit definitions.  
7.8.4.1 Master Configuration  
When data transfer is complete:  
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware  
In a master configuration, the serial clock is gener-  
ated on the SCK pin.  
– An interrupt is generated if the SPIE bit is set  
and the I bit in the CCR register is cleared.  
Procedure  
– Select the SPR0 & SPR1 bits to define the se-  
rial clock baud rate (see CR register).  
During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is set, a  
copy of the data byte received in the shift register  
is moved to a buffer. When the DR register is read,  
the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value.  
– Select the CPOL and CPHA bits to define one  
of the four relationships between the data  
transfer and the serial clock (see Figure 52).  
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence:  
– The SS pin must be connected to a high level  
signal during the complete byte transmit se-  
quence.  
1. An access to the SR register while the SPIF bit  
is set  
– The MSTR and SPE bits must be set (they re-  
main set only if the SS pin is connected to a  
high level signal).  
2. A read to the DR register.  
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the DR  
register are inhibited until the SR register is read.  
91/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.4.2 Slave Configuration  
When data transfer is complete:  
– The SPIF bit is set by hardware  
In slave configuration, the serial clock is received  
on the SCK pin from the master device.  
– An interrupt is generated if SPIE bit is set and  
I bit in CCR register is cleared.  
The value of the SPR0 & SPR1 bits is not used for  
the data transfer.  
During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is set, a  
copy of the data byte received in the shift register  
is moved to a buffer. When the DR register is read,  
the SPI peripheral returns this buffered value.  
Procedure  
– For correct data transfer, the slave device  
must be in the same timing mode as the mas-  
ter device (CPOL and CPHA bits). See Figure  
52.  
Clearing the SPIF bit is performed by the following  
software sequence:  
1. An access to the SR register while the SPIF bit  
is set.  
– The SS pin must be connected to a low level  
signal during the complete byte transmit se-  
quence.  
2.A read to the DR register.  
– Clear the MSTR bit and set the SPE bit to as-  
sign the pins to alternate function.  
Notes: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the  
DR register are inhibited until the SR register is  
read.  
In this configuration the MOSI pin is a data input  
and the MISO pin is a data output.  
The SPIF bit can be cleared during a second  
transmission; however, it must be cleared before  
the second SPIF bit in order to prevent an overrun  
condition (see Section 9.8.4.6).  
Transmit Sequence  
The data byte is parallel loaded into the 8-bit shift  
register (from the internal bus) during a write cycle  
and then shifted out serially to the MISO pin most  
significant bit first.  
Depending on the CPHA bit, the SS pin has to be  
set to write to the DR register between each data  
byte transfer to avoid a write collision (see Section  
9.8.4.4).  
The transmit sequence begins when the slave de-  
vice receives the clock signal and the most signifi-  
cant bit of the data on its MOSI pin.  
92/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.4.3 Data Transfer Format  
The master device applies data to its MOSI pin-  
clock edge before the capture clock edge.  
During an SPI transfer, data is simultaneously  
transmitted (shifted out serially) and received  
(shifted in serially). The serial clock is used to syn-  
chronize the data transfer during a sequence of  
eight clock pulses.  
CPHA bit is set  
The second edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if  
the CPOL bit is reset, rising edge if the CPOL bit is  
set) is the MSBit capture strobe. Data is latched on  
the occurrence of the second clock transition.  
The SS pin allows individual selection of a slave  
device; the other slave devices that are not select-  
ed do not interfere with the SPI transfer.  
No write collision should occur even if the SS pin  
stays low during a transfer of several bytes (see  
Figure 51).  
Clock Phase and Clock Polarity  
Four possible timing relationships may be chosen  
by software, using the CPOL and CPHA bits.  
CPHA bit is reset  
The CPOL (clock polarity) bit controls the steady  
state value of the clock when no data is being  
transferred. This bit affects both master and slave  
modes.  
The first edge on the SCK pin (falling edge if CPOL  
bit is set, rising edge if CPOL bit is reset) is the  
MSBit capture strobe. Data is latched on the oc-  
currence of the first clock transition.  
The combination between the CPOL and CPHA  
(clock phase) bits selects the data capture clock  
edge.  
The SS pin must be toggled high and low between  
each byte transmitted (see Figure 51).  
To protect the transmission from a write collision a  
low value on the SS pin of a slave device freezes  
the data in its DR register and does not allow it to  
be altered. Therefore the SS pin must be high to  
write a new data byte in the DR without producing  
a write collision.  
Figure 52, shows an SPI transfer with the four  
combinations of the CPHA and CPOL bits. The di-  
agram may be interpreted as a master or slave  
timing diagram where the SCK pin, the MISO pin,  
the MOSI pin are directly connected between the  
master and the slave device.  
The SS pin is the slave device select input and can  
be driven by the master device.  
Figure 51. CPHA / SS Timing Diagram  
Byte 3  
Byte 2  
MOSI/MISO  
Byte 1  
Master SS  
Slave SS  
(CPHA=0)  
Slave SS  
(CPHA=1)  
VR02131A  
93/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
Figure 52. Data Clock Timing Diagram  
CPHA =1  
SCLK (with  
CPOL = 1)  
SCLK (with  
CPOL = 0)  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit3  
Bit 2  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
LSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit  
MSBit  
Bit 6  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
MISO  
(from master)  
Bit3  
MOSI  
(from slave)  
SS  
(to slave)  
CAPTURE STROBE  
CPHA =0  
CPOL = 1  
CPOL = 0  
Bit 4  
Bit 4  
Bit3  
Bit 2  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 1  
LSBit  
LSBit  
MSBit  
Bit 6  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 5  
MISO  
(from master)  
MSBit  
Bit3  
MOSI  
(from slave)  
SS  
(to slave)  
CAPTURE STROBE  
Note: This figure should not be used as a replacement for parametric information.  
Refer to the Electrical Characteristics chapter.  
VR02131B  
94/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.4.4 Write Collision Error  
When the CPHA bit is reset:  
A write collision occurs when the software tries to  
write to the DR register while a data transfer is tak-  
ing place with an external device. When this hap-  
pens, the transfer continues uninterrupted; and  
the software write will be unsuccessful.  
Data is latched on the occurrence of the first clock  
transition. The slave device does not have any  
way of knowing when that transition will occur;  
therefore, the slave device collision occurs when  
software attempts to write the DR register after its  
SS pin has been pulled low.  
Write collisions can occur both in master and slave  
mode.  
For this reason, the SS pin must be high, between  
each data byte transfer, to allow the CPU to write  
in the DR register without generating a write colli-  
sion.  
Note: a "read collision" will never occur since the  
received data byte is placed in a buffer in which  
access is always synchronous with the MCU oper-  
ation.  
In Slave mode  
In Master mode  
When the CPHA bit is set:  
Collision in the master device is defined as a write  
of the DR register while the internal serial clock  
(SCK) is in the process of transfer.  
The slave device will receive a clock (SCK) edge  
prior to the latch of the first data transfer. This first  
clock edge will freeze the data in the slave device  
DR register and output the MSBit on to the exter-  
nal MISO pin of the slave device.  
The SS pin signal must be always high on the  
master device.  
The SS pin low state enables the slave device but  
the output of the MSBit onto the MISO pin does  
not take place until the first data transfer clock  
edge.  
WCOL bit  
The WCOL bit in the SR register is set if a write  
collision occurs.  
No SPI interrupt is generated when the WCOL bit  
is set (the WCOL bit is a status flag only).  
Clearing the WCOL bit is done through a software  
sequence (see Figure 53).  
Figure 53. Clearing the WCOL bit (Write Collision Flag) Software Sequence  
Clearing sequence after SPIF = 1 (end of a data byte transfer)  
Read SR  
Read SR  
1st Step  
2nd Step  
OR  
THEN  
THEN  
SPIF =0  
WCOL=0  
SPIF =0  
WCOL=0 if no transfer has started  
WCOL=1 if a transfer has started  
before the 2nd step  
Read DR  
Write DR  
Clearing sequence before SPIF = 1 (during a data byte transfer)  
Read SR  
1st Step  
THEN  
Note: Writing in DR register in-  
2nd Step  
Read DR  
stead of reading in it do not reset  
WCOL bit  
WCOL=0  
95/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.4.5 Master Mode Fault  
may be restored to their original state during or af-  
ter this clearing sequence.  
Master mode fault occurs when the master device  
has its SS pin pulled low, then the MODF bit is set.  
Hardware does not allow the user to set the SPE  
and MSTR bits while the MODF bit is set except in  
the MODF bit clearing sequence.  
Master mode fault affects the SPI peripheral in the  
following ways:  
In a slave device the MODF bit can not be set, but  
in a multi master configuration the device can be in  
slave mode with this MODF bit set.  
– The MODF bit is set and an SPI interrupt is  
generated if the SPIE bit is set.  
– The SPE bit is reset. This blocks all output  
from the device and disables the SPI periph-  
eral.  
The MODF bit indicates that there might have  
been a multi-master conflict for system control and  
allows a proper exit from system operation to a re-  
set or default system state using an interrupt rou-  
tine.  
– The MSTR bit is reset, thus forcing the device  
into slave mode.  
Clearing the MODF bit is done through a software  
sequence:  
7.8.4.6 Overrun Condition  
An overrun condition occurs when the master de-  
vice has sent several data bytes and the slave de-  
vice has not cleared the SPIF bit issuing from the  
previous data byte transmitted.  
1. A read or write access to the SR register while  
the MODF bit is set.  
2. A write to the CR register.  
In this case, the receiver buffer contains the byte  
sent after the SPIF bit was last cleared. A read to  
the DR register returns this byte. All other bytes  
are lost.  
Notes: To avoid any multiple slave conflicts in the  
case of a system comprising several MCUs, the  
SS pin must be pulled high during the clearing se-  
quence of the MODF bit. The SPE and MSTR bits  
This condition is not detected by the SPI peripher-  
al.  
96/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.4.7 Single Master and Multimaster Configurations  
There are two types of SPI systems:  
– Single Master System  
For more security, the slave device may respond  
to the master with the received data byte. Then the  
master will receive the previous byte back from the  
slave device if all MISO and MOSI pins are con-  
nected and the slave has not written its DR regis-  
ter.  
– Multimaster System  
Single Master System  
Other transmission security methods can use  
ports for handshake lines or data bytes with com-  
mand fields.  
A typical single master system may be configured,  
using an MCU as the master and four MCUs as  
slaves (see Figure 54).  
Multi-master System  
The master device selects the individual slave de-  
vices by using four pins of a parallel port to control  
the four SS pins of the slave devices.  
A multi-master system may also be configured by  
the user. Transfer of master control could be im-  
plemented using a handshake method through the  
I/O ports or by an exchange of code messages  
through the serial peripheral interface system.  
The SS pins are pulled high during reset since the  
master device ports will be forced to be inputs at  
that time, thus disabling the slave devices.  
The multi-master system is principally handled by  
the MSTR bit in the CR register and the MODF bit  
in the SR register.  
Note: To prevent a bus conflict on the MISO line  
the master allows only one active slave device  
during a transmission.  
Figure 54. Single Master Configuration  
SS  
SS  
SS  
SS  
SCK  
SCK  
Slave  
SCK  
Slave  
SCK  
Slave  
MCU  
Slave  
MCU  
MCU  
MCU  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
MOSI MISO  
SCK  
Master  
MCU  
5V  
SS  
97/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.5 Low Power Modes  
Mode  
Description  
No effect on SPI.  
WAIT  
SPI interrupt events cause the device to exit from WAIT mode.  
SPI registers are frozen.  
HALT  
In HALT mode, the SPI is inactive. SPI operation resumes when the MCU is woken up by an interrupt with  
“exit from HALT mode” capability.  
7.8.6 Interrupts  
Enable  
Control from  
Bit  
Exit  
Exit  
from  
Halt  
Event  
Flag  
Interrupt Event  
Wait  
Yes  
Yes  
SPI End of Transfer Event  
Master Mode Fault Event  
SPIF  
No  
No  
SPIE  
MODF  
Note: The SPI interrupt events are connected to  
the same interrupt vector (see Interrupts chapter).  
They generate an interrupt if the corresponding  
Enable Control Bit is set and the interrupt mask in  
the CC register is reset (RIM instruction).  
98/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
7.8.7 Register Description  
CONTROL REGISTER (CR)  
Read/Write  
Bit 3 = CPOL Clock polarity.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. This bit de-  
termines the steady state of the serial Clock. The  
CPOL bit affects both the master and slave  
modes.  
Reset Value: 0000xxxx (0xh)  
7
0
SPIE SPE SPR2 MSTR CPOL CPHA SPR1 SPR0  
0: The steady state is a low value at the SCK pin.  
1: The steady state is a high value at the SCK pin.  
Bit 7 = SPIE Serial peripheral interrupt enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: Interrupt is inhibited  
1: An SPI interrupt is generated whenever SPIF=1  
or MODF=1 in the SR register  
Bit 2 = CPHA Clock phase.  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: The first clock transition is the first data capture  
edge.  
1: The second clock transition is the first capture  
edge.  
Bit 6 = SPE Serial peripheral output enable.  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also  
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0  
(see Section 9.8.4.5 Master Mode Fault).  
0: I/O port connected to pins  
Bit 1:0 = SPR[1:0] Serial peripheral rate.  
These bits are set and cleared by software.Used  
with the SPR2 bit, they select one of six baud rates  
to be used as the serial clock when the device is a  
master.  
1: SPI alternate functions connected to pins  
The SPE bit is cleared by reset, so the SPI periph-  
eral is not initially connected to the external pins.  
These 2 bits have no effect in slave mode.  
Table 18. Serial Peripheral Baud Rate  
Bit 5 = SPR2 Divider Enable.  
Serial Clock  
SPR2 SPR1 SPR0  
this bit is set and cleared by software and it is  
cleared by reset. It is used with the SPR[1:0] bits to  
set the baud rate. Refer to Table 19.  
0: Divider by 2 enabled  
f
f
/4  
/8  
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
CPU  
CPU  
f
f
f
/16  
/32  
/64  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
1: Divider by 2 disabled  
Bit 4 = MSTR Master.  
f
/128  
CPU  
This bit is set and cleared by software. It is also  
cleared by hardware when, in master mode, SS=0  
(see Section 9.8.4.5 Master Mode Fault).  
0: Slave mode is selected  
1: Master mode is selected, the function of the  
SCK pin changes from an input to an output and  
the functions of the MISO and MOSI pins are re-  
versed.  
99/152  
ST72C171  
SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (Cont’d)  
STATUS REGISTER (SR)  
Read Only  
DATA I/O REGISTER (DR)  
Read/Write  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: Undefined  
7
0
-
7
0
SPIF  
WCOL  
-
MODF  
-
-
-
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Bit 7 = SPIF Serial Peripheral data transfer flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when a transfer has  
been completed. An interrupt is generated if  
SPIE=1 in the CR register. It is cleared by a soft-  
ware sequence (an access to the SR register fol-  
lowed by a read or write to the DR register).  
0: Data transfer is in progress or has been ap-  
proved by a clearing sequence.  
The DR register is used to transmit and receive  
data on the serial bus. In the master device only a  
write to this register will initiate transmission/re-  
ception of another byte.  
Notes: During the last clock cycle the SPIF bit is  
set, a copy of the received data byte in the shift  
register is moved to a buffer. When the user reads  
the serial peripheral data I/O register, the buffer is  
actually being read.  
1: Data transfer between the device and an exter-  
nal device has been completed.  
Warning:  
Note: While the SPIF bit is set, all writes to the DR  
register are inhibited.  
A write to the DR register places data directly into  
the shift register for transmission.  
A write to the the DR register returns the value lo-  
cated in the buffer and not the contents of the shift  
register (See Figure 50 ).  
Bit 6 = WCOL Write Collision status.  
This bit is set by hardware when a write to the DR  
register is done during a transmit sequence. It is  
cleared by a software sequence (see Figure 53).  
0: No write collision occurred  
1: A write collision has been detected  
Bit 5 = Unused.  
Bit 4 = MODF Mode Fault flag.  
This bit is set by hardware when the SS pin is  
pulled low in master mode (see Section 9.8.4.5  
Master Mode Fault). An SPI interrupt can be gen-  
erated if SPIE=1 in the CR register. This bit is  
cleared by a software sequence (An access to the  
SR register while MODF=1 followed by a write to  
the CR register).  
0: No master mode fault detected  
1: A fault in master mode has been detected  
Bits 3-0 = Unused.  
100/152  
ST72C171  
Table 19. SPI Register Map and Reset Values  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Name  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DR  
D7  
-
D6  
D5  
-
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
-
D0  
-
21  
22  
23  
Reset Value  
CR  
-
SPE  
0
-
MSTR  
0
-
-
SPIE  
0
-
CPOL  
CPHA  
SPR1  
SPR0  
Reset Value  
SR  
0
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
x
-
SPIF  
0
WCOL  
0
MODF  
0
Reset Value  
0
0
0
0
0
101/152  
ST72C171  
7.9 8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC)  
7.9.1 Introduction  
7.9.3 Functional Description  
7.9.3.1 Analog Power Supply  
The on-chip Analog to Digital Converter (ADC) pe-  
ripheral is a 8-bit, successive approximation con-  
verter with internal sample and hold circuitry. This  
peripheral has up to 16 multiplexed analog input  
channels (refer to device pin out description) that  
allow the peripheral to convert the analog voltage  
levels from up to 16 different sources.  
V
and V  
are the high and low level refer-  
SSA  
DDA  
ence voltage pins. In some devices (refer to device  
pin out description) they are internally connected  
to the V and V pins.  
DD  
SS  
Conversion accuracy may therefore be impacted  
by voltage drops and noise in the event of heavily  
loaded or badly decoupled power supply lines.  
The result of the conversion is stored in a 8-bit  
Data Register. The A/D converter is controlled  
through a Control/Status Register.  
See electrical characteristics section for more de-  
tails.  
7.9.2 Main Features  
8-bit conversion  
Up to 16 channels with multiplexed input  
Linear successive approximation  
Data register (DR) which contains the results  
Conversion complete status flag  
On/off bit (to reduce consumption)  
The block diagram is shown in Figure 55.  
Figure 55. ADC Block Diagram  
f
f
ADC  
CPU  
DIV 2  
COCO  
0
ADON  
4
0
CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0  
ADCCSR  
AIN0  
AIN1  
HOLD CONTROL  
R
ADC  
ANALOG TO DIGITAL  
CONVERTER  
ANALOG  
MUX  
AINx  
C
ADC  
ADCDR  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
102/152  
ST72C171  
8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)  
7.9.3.2 Digital A/D Conversion Result  
The analog input ports must be configured as in-  
put, no pull-up, no interrupt. Refer to the «I/O  
ports» chapter. Using these pins as analog inputs  
does not affect the ability of the port to be read as  
a logic input.  
The conversion is monotonic, meaning that the re-  
sult never decreases if the analog input does not  
and never increases if the analog input does not.  
If the input voltage (V ) is greater than or equal  
AIN  
In the CSR register:  
to V  
(high-level voltage reference) then the  
DDA  
conversion result in the DR register is FFh (full  
scale) without overflow indication.  
– Select the CH[3:0] bits to assign the analog  
channel to be converted.  
ADC Conversion  
If input voltage (V ) is lower than or equal to  
AIN  
V
(low-level voltage reference) then the con-  
version result in the DR register is 00h.  
SSA  
In the CSR register:  
– Set the ADON bit to enable the A/D converter  
and to start the first conversion. From this time  
on, the ADC performs a continuous conver-  
sion of the selected channel.  
The A/D converter is linear and the digital result of  
the conversion is stored in the ADCDR register.  
The accuracy of the conversion is described in the  
parametric section.  
When a conversion is complete  
R
is the maximum recommended impedance  
– The COCO bit is set by hardware.  
– No interrupt is generated.  
– The result is in the DR register and remains  
valid until the next conversion has ended.  
AIN  
for an analog input signal. If the impedance is too  
high, this will result in a loss of accuracy due to  
leakage and sampling not being completed in the  
alloted time.  
A write to the CSR register (with ADON set) aborts  
the current conversion, resets the COCO bit and  
starts a new conversion.  
7.9.3.3 A/D Conversion Phases  
The A/D conversion is based on two conversion  
phases as shown in Figure 56:  
Figure 56. ADC Conversion Timings  
Sample capacitor loading [duration: t  
]
LOAD  
During this phase, the V  
input voltage to be  
AIN  
ADON  
measured is loaded into the C  
capacitor.  
sample  
ADC  
ADCCSR WRITE  
OPERATION  
t
CONV  
A/D conversion [duration: t  
]
CONV  
During this phase, the A/D conversion is  
computed (8 successive approximations cycles)  
HOLD  
CONTROL  
and the C  
sample capacitor is disconnected  
ADC  
from the analog input pin to get the optimum  
analog to digital conversion accuracy.  
t
LOAD  
COCO BIT SET  
While the ADC is on, these two phases are contin-  
uously repeated.  
7.9.4 Low Power Modes  
At the end of each conversion, the sample capaci-  
tor is kept loaded with the previous measurement  
load. The advantage of this behaviour is that it  
minimizes the current consumption on the analog  
pin in case of single input channel measurement.  
Mode  
WAIT  
Description  
No effect on A/D Converter  
A/D Converter disabled.  
After wakeup from Halt mode, the A/D Con-  
verter requires a stabilisation time before ac-  
curate conversions can be performed.  
HALT  
7.9.3.4 Software Procedure  
Refer to the control/status register (CSR) and data  
register (DR) in Section 9.9.6 for the bit definitions  
and to Figure 56 for the timings.  
Note: The A/D converter may be disabled by reset-  
ting the ADON bit. This feature allows reduced  
power consumption when no conversion is needed  
and between single shot conversions.  
ADC Configuration  
The total duration of the A/D conversion is 12 ADC  
7.9.5 Interrupts  
clock periods (1/f  
=2/f  
).  
ADC  
CPU  
None  
103/152  
ST72C171  
8-BIT A/D CONVERTER (ADC) (Cont’d)  
7.9.6 Register Description  
CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER (CSR)  
Read/Write  
DATA REGISTER (DR)  
Read Only  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
Reset Value: 0000 0000 (00h)  
7
0
7
0
COCO  
0
ADON  
0
CH3  
CH2  
CH1  
CH0  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
Bit 7 = COCO Conversion Complete  
This bit is set by hardware. It is cleared by soft-  
ware reading the result in the DR register or writing  
to the CSR register.  
0: Conversion is not complete  
1: Conversion can be read from the DR register  
Bit 7:0 = D[7:0] Analog Converted Value  
This register contains the converted analog value  
in the range 00h to FFh.  
Note: Reading this register reset the COCO flag.  
Bit 6 = Reserved. must always be cleared.  
Bit 5 = ADON A/D Converter On  
This bit is set and cleared by software.  
0: A/D converter is switched off  
1: A/D converter is switched on  
Bit 4 = Reserved. must always be cleared.  
Bit 3:0 = CH[3:0] Channel Selection  
These bits are set and cleared by software. They  
select the analog input to convert.  
Channel Pin*  
CH3 CH2 CH1 CH0  
AIN0  
AIN1  
AIN2  
AIN3  
AIN4  
AIN5  
AIN6  
AIN7  
AIN8  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
AIN9  
AIN10  
AIN11  
AIN12  
AIN13  
AIN14  
AIN15  
*Note: The number of pins AND the channel selec-  
tion varies according to the device. Refer to the de-  
vice pinout.  
104/152  
ST72C171  
Table 20. ADC Register Map  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Register  
Name  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
DR  
0070h  
AD7  
0
AD6  
0
AD5  
0
AD4  
0
AD3  
0
AD2  
0
AD1  
0
AD0  
0
Reset Value  
CSR  
0071h  
COCO  
0
EXTCK  
0
ADON  
0
0
0
CH3  
0
CH2  
0
CH1  
0
CH0  
0
Reset Value  
105/152  
ST72C171  
8 INSTRUCTION SET  
8.1 ST7 ADDRESSING MODES  
so, most of the addressing modes may be subdi-  
vided in two sub-modes called long and short:  
The ST7 Core features 17 different addressing  
modes which can be classified in 7 main groups:  
– Long addressing mode is more powerful be-  
cause it can use the full 64 Kbyte address space,  
however it uses more bytes and more CPU cy-  
cles.  
Addressing Mode  
Inherent  
Example  
nop  
– Short addressing mode is less powerful because  
it can generally only access page zero (0000h -  
00FFh range), but the instruction size is more  
compact, and faster. All memory to memory in-  
structions use short addressing modes only  
(CLR, CPL, NEG, BSET, BRES, BTJT, BTJF,  
INC, DEC, RLC, RRC, SLL, SRL, SRA, SWAP)  
Immediate  
Direct  
ld A,#$55  
ld A,$55  
Indexed  
ld A,($55,X)  
ld A,([$55],X)  
jrne loop  
Indirect  
Relative  
Bit operation  
bset byte,#5  
The ST7 Assembler optimizes the use of long and  
short addressing modes.  
The ST7 Instruction set is designed to minimize  
the number of bytes required per instruction: To do  
Table 21. ST7 Addressing Mode Overview  
Pointer  
Address  
(Hex.)  
Pointer  
Size  
(Hex.)  
Destination/  
Source  
Length  
(Bytes)  
Mode  
Syntax  
Inherent  
Immediate  
Short  
nop  
+ 0  
+ 1  
+ 1  
+ 2  
ld A,#$55  
ld A,$10  
Direct  
Direct  
00..FF  
Long  
ld A,$1000  
0000..FFFF  
+ 0 (with X register)  
+ 1 (with Y register)  
No Offset  
Direct  
Indexed  
ld A,(X)  
00..FF  
Short  
Long  
Short  
Long  
Short  
Long  
Relative  
Relative  
Bit  
Direct  
Indexed  
Indexed  
ld A,($10,X)  
ld A,($1000,X)  
ld A,[$10]  
00..1FE  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 1  
+ 2  
+ 2  
+ 3  
Direct  
0000..FFFF  
00..FF  
Indirect  
Indirect  
Indirect  
Indirect  
Direct  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
byte  
word  
byte  
word  
ld A,[$10.w]  
ld A,([$10],X)  
0000..FFFF  
00..1FE  
Indexed  
Indexed  
ld A,([$10.w],X) 0000..FFFF  
1)  
1)  
jrne loop  
PC-128/PC+127  
Indirect  
Direct  
jrne [$10]  
PC-128/PC+127  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
00..FF  
byte  
byte  
byte  
bset $10,#7  
bset [$10],#7  
Bit  
Indirect  
Direct  
00..FF  
Bit  
Relative btjt $10,#7,skip 00..FF  
Relative btjt [$10],#7,skip 00..FF  
Bit  
Indirect  
Note 1. At the time the instruction is executed, the Program Counter (PC) points to the instruction follow-  
ing JRxx.  
106/152  
ST72C171  
ST7 ADDRESSING MODES (Cont’d)  
8.1.1 Inherent  
8.1.3 Direct  
All Inherent instructions consist of a single byte.  
The opcode fully specifies all the required informa-  
tion for the CPU to process the operation.  
In Direct instructions, the operands are referenced  
by their memory address.  
The direct addressing mode consists of two sub-  
modes:  
Inherent Instruction  
Function  
No operation  
Direct (short)  
NOP  
The address is a byte, thus requires only one byte  
after the opcode, but only allows 00 - FF address-  
ing space.  
TRAP  
S/W Interrupt  
Wait For Interrupt (Low Power  
Mode)  
WFI  
Direct (long)  
Halt Oscillator (Lowest Power  
Mode)  
HALT  
The address is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-  
dressing space, but requires 2 bytes after the op-  
code.  
RET  
Sub-routine Return  
Interrupt Sub-routine Return  
Set Interrupt Mask  
Reset Interrupt Mask  
Set Carry Flag  
IRET  
SIM  
8.1.4 Indexed (No Offset, Short, Long)  
RIM  
In this mode, the operand is referenced by its  
memory address, which is defined by the unsigned  
addition of an index register (X or Y) with an offset.  
SCF  
RCF  
Reset Carry Flag  
Reset Stack Pointer  
Load  
The indirect addressing mode consists of three  
sub-modes:  
RSP  
LD  
Indexed (No Offset)  
CLR  
Clear  
There is no offset, (no extra byte after the opcode),  
and allows 00 - FF addressing space.  
PUSH/POP  
INC/DEC  
TNZ  
Push/Pop to/from the stack  
Increment/Decrement  
Test Negative or Zero  
1 or 2 Complement  
Byte Multiplication  
Indexed (Short)  
The offset is a byte, thus requires only one byte af-  
ter the opcode and allows 00 - 1FE addressing  
space.  
CPL, NEG  
MUL  
Indexed (long)  
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,  
RRC  
Shift and Rotate Operations  
Swap Nibbles  
The offset is a word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte ad-  
dressing space and requires 2 bytes after the op-  
code.  
SWAP  
8.1.2 Immediate  
Immediate instructions have two bytes, the first  
byte contains the opcode, the second byte con-  
tains the operand value.  
8.1.5 Indirect (Short, Long)  
The required data byte to do the operation is found  
by its memory address, located in memory (point-  
er).  
Immediate Instruction  
Function  
The pointer address follows the opcode. The indi-  
rect addressing mode consists of two sub-modes:  
LD  
Load  
CP  
Compare  
Indirect (short)  
BCP  
Bit Compare  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
byte, thus allowing 00 - FF addressing space, and  
requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
AND, OR, XOR  
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC  
Logical Operations  
Arithmetic Operations  
Indirect (long)  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
107/152  
ST72C171  
ST7 ADDRESSING MODES (Cont’d)  
8.1.6 Indirect Indexed (Short, Long)  
SWAP  
Swap Nibbles  
This is a combination of indirect and short indexed  
addressing modes. The operand is referenced by  
its memory address, which is defined by the un-  
signed addition of an index register value (X or Y)  
with a pointer value located in memory. The point-  
er address follows the opcode.  
CALL, JP  
Call or Jump subroutine  
8.1.7 Relative Mode (Direct, Indirect)  
This addressing mode is used to modify the PC  
register value by adding an 8-bit signed offset to it.  
Available Relative Direct/  
Function  
The indirect indexed addressing mode consists of  
two sub-modes:  
Indirect Instructions  
JRxx  
Conditional Jump  
Call Relative  
Indirect Indexed (Short)  
CALLR  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
byte, thus allowing 00 - 1FE addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
The relative addressing mode consists of two sub-  
modes:  
Indirect Indexed (Long)  
Relative (Direct)  
The pointer address is a byte, the pointer size is a  
word, thus allowing 64 Kbyte addressing space,  
and requires 1 byte after the opcode.  
The offset follows the opcode.  
Relative (Indirect)  
The offset is defined in memory, of which the ad-  
dress follows the opcode.  
Table 22. Instructions Supporting Direct,  
Indexed, Indirect and Indirect Indexed  
Addressing Modes  
Long and Short  
Function  
Instructions  
LD  
Load  
CP  
Compare  
AND, OR, XOR  
Logical Operations  
Arithmetic Addition/subtrac-  
tion operations  
ADC, ADD, SUB, SBC  
BCP  
Bit Compare  
Short Instructions Only  
CLR  
Function  
Clear  
INC, DEC  
Increment/Decrement  
Test Negative or Zero  
1 or 2 Complement  
Bit Operations  
TNZ  
CPL, NEG  
BSET, BRES  
Bit Test and Jump Opera-  
tions  
BTJT, BTJF  
SLL, SRL, SRA, RLC,  
RRC  
Shift and Rotate Operations  
108/152  
ST72C171  
8.2 INSTRUCTION GROUPS  
The ST7 family devices use an Instruction Set  
consisting of 63 instructions. The instructions may  
be subdivided into 13 main groups as illustrated in  
the following table:  
Load and Transfer  
LD  
CLR  
POP  
DEC  
TNZ  
OR  
Stack operation  
PUSH  
INC  
RSP  
BCP  
Increment/Decrement  
Compare and Tests  
Logical operations  
CP  
AND  
BSET  
BTJT  
ADC  
SLL  
XOR  
CPL  
NEG  
Bit Operation  
BRES  
BTJF  
ADD  
SRL  
JRT  
Conditional Bit Test and Branch  
Arithmetic operations  
Shift and Rotates  
SUB  
SRA  
JRF  
SBC  
RLC  
JP  
MUL  
RRC  
CALL  
SWAP  
CALLR  
SLA  
Unconditional Jump or Call  
Conditional Branch  
JRA  
JRxx  
TRAP  
SIM  
NOP  
RET  
Interruption management  
Code Condition Flag modification  
WFI  
RIM  
HALT  
SCF  
IRET  
RCF  
Using a pre-byte  
The instructions are described with one to four  
bytes.  
These prebytes enable instruction in Y as well as  
indirect addressing modes to be implemented.  
They precede the opcode of the instruction in X or  
the instruction using direct addressing mode. The  
prebytes are:  
In order to extend the number of available op-  
codes for an 8-bit CPU (256 opcodes), three differ-  
ent prebyte opcodes are defined. These prebytes  
modify the meaning of the instruction they pre-  
cede.  
PDY 90 Replace an X based instruction using  
immediate, direct, indexed, or inherent  
addressing mode by a Y one.  
The whole instruction becomes:  
PC-2 End of previous instruction  
PC-1 Prebyte  
PIX 92 Replace an instruction using direct, di-  
rect bit, or direct relative addressing  
mode to an instruction using the corre-  
sponding indirect addressing mode.  
It also changes an instruction using X  
indexed addressing mode to an instruc-  
tion using indirect X indexed addressing  
mode.  
PC  
Opcode  
PC+1 Additional word (0 to 2) according to the  
number of bytes required to compute the  
effective address  
PIY 91 Replace an instruction using X indirect  
indexed addressing mode by a Y one.  
109/152  
ST72C171  
INSTRUCTION GROUPS (Cont’d)  
Mnemo  
ADC  
ADD  
AND  
BCP  
Description  
Add with Carry  
Function/Example  
A = A + M + C  
A = A + M  
Dst  
Src  
H
H
H
I
N
N
N
N
N
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
C
C
A
M
M
M
M
Addition  
A
Logical And  
A = A . M  
A
Bit compare A, Memory  
Bit Reset  
tst (A . M)  
A
BRES  
BSET  
BTJF  
BTJT  
CALL  
CALLR  
CLR  
bres Byte, #3  
bset Byte, #3  
btjf Byte, #3, Jmp1  
btjt Byte, #3, Jmp1  
M
M
M
M
Bit Set  
Jump if bit is false (0)  
Jump if bit is true (1)  
Call subroutine  
Call subroutine relative  
Clear  
C
C
reg, M  
reg  
0
N
N
N
1
Z
Z
Z
CP  
Arithmetic Compare  
One Complement  
Decrement  
tst(Reg - M)  
A = FFH-A  
dec Y  
M
C
1
CPL  
reg, M  
reg, M  
DEC  
HALT  
IRET  
INC  
Halt  
0
I
Interrupt routine return  
Increment  
Pop CC, A, X, PC  
inc X  
H
N
N
Z
Z
C
reg, M  
JP  
Absolute Jump  
Jump relative always  
Jump relative  
jp [TBL.w]  
JRA  
JRT  
JRF  
Never jump  
jrf *  
JRIH  
JRIL  
Jump if ext. interrupt = 1  
Jump if ext. interrupt = 0  
Jump if H = 1  
JRH  
H = 1 ?  
JRNH  
JRM  
Jump if H = 0  
H = 0 ?  
Jump if I = 1  
I = 1 ?  
JRNM  
JRMI  
JRPL  
JREQ  
JRNE  
JRC  
Jump if I = 0  
I = 0 ?  
Jump if N = 1 (minus)  
Jump if N = 0 (plus)  
Jump if Z = 1 (equal)  
Jump if Z = 0 (not equal)  
Jump if C = 1  
N = 1 ?  
N = 0 ?  
Z = 1 ?  
Z = 0 ?  
C = 1 ?  
JRNC  
JRULT  
Jump if C = 0  
C = 0 ?  
Jump if C = 1  
Unsigned <  
Jmp if unsigned >=  
Unsigned >  
JRUGE Jump if C = 0  
JRUGT Jump if (C + Z = 0)  
110/152  
ST72C171  
INSTRUCTION GROUPS (Cont’d)  
Mnemo  
JRULE  
LD  
Description  
Jump if (C + Z = 1)  
Load  
Function/Example  
Unsigned <=  
dst <= src  
Dst  
Src  
H
I
N
N
N
N
N
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
reg, M  
A, X, Y  
reg, M  
M, reg  
X, Y, A  
MUL  
NEG  
NOP  
OR  
Multiply  
X,A = X * A  
0
0
Negate (2’s compl)  
No Operation  
OR operation  
Pop from the Stack  
neg $10  
C
A = A + M  
pop reg  
pop CC  
push Y  
C = 0  
A
M
POP  
reg  
CC  
M
M
M
H
I
C
0
PUSH  
RCF  
RET  
RIM  
Push onto the Stack  
Reset carry flag  
Subroutine Return  
Enable Interrupts  
Rotate left true C  
Rotate right true C  
Reset Stack Pointer  
Subtract with Carry  
Set carry flag  
reg, CC  
I = 0  
0
RLC  
RRC  
RSP  
SBC  
SCF  
SIM  
C <= Dst <= C  
C => Dst => C  
S = Max allowed  
A = A - M - C  
C = 1  
reg, M  
reg, M  
N
N
Z
Z
C
C
A
M
N
Z
C
1
Disable Interrupts  
Shift left Arithmetic  
Shift left Logic  
I = 1  
1
SLA  
C <= Dst <= 0  
C <= Dst <= 0  
0 => Dst => C  
Dst7 => Dst => C  
A = A - M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
reg, M  
A
N
N
0
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
C
C
C
C
C
SLL  
SRL  
SRA  
SUB  
SWAP  
TNZ  
TRAP  
WFI  
Shift right Logic  
Shift right Arithmetic  
Subtraction  
N
N
N
N
M
SWAP nibbles  
Dst[7..4] <=> Dst[3..0] reg, M  
tnz lbl1  
Test for Neg & Zero  
S/W trap  
S/W interrupt  
1
0
Wait for Interrupt  
Exclusive OR  
XOR  
A = A XOR M  
A
M
N
Z
111/152  
ST72C171  
9 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
9.1 PARAMETER CONDITIONS  
Unless otherwise specified, all voltages are re-  
9.1.5 Pin input voltage  
ferred to V  
.
SS  
The input voltage measurement on a pin of the de-  
vice is described in Figure 58.  
9.1.1 Minimum and Maximum values  
Unless otherwise specified the minimum and max-  
imum values are guaranteed in the worst condi-  
tions of ambient temperature, supply voltage and  
frequencies by tests in production on 100% of the  
Figure 58. Pin input voltage  
devices with an ambient temperature at T =25°C  
A
ST7 PIN  
and T =T max (given by the selected temperature  
A
A
range).  
V
Data based on characterization results, design  
simulation and/or technology characteristics are  
indicated in the table footnotes and are not tested  
in production. Based on characterization, the min-  
imum and maximum values refer to sample tests  
and represent the mean value plus or minus three  
times the standard deviation (mean±3Σ).  
IN  
9.1.2 Typical values  
Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based  
on T =25°C, V =5V (for the 4.5VV 5.5V  
A
DD  
DD  
voltage range) and V =3.3V (for the 3VV 4V  
DD  
DD  
voltage range). They are given only as design  
guidelines and are not tested.  
9.1.3 Typical curves  
Unless otherwise specified, all typical curves are  
given only as design guidelines and are not tested.  
9.1.4 Loading capacitor  
The loading conditions used for pin parameter  
measurement are shown in Figure 57.  
Figure 57. Pin loading conditions  
ST7 PIN  
C
L
112/152  
ST72C171  
9.2 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Stresses above those listed as “absolute maxi-  
mum ratings” may cause permanent damage to  
the device. This is a stress rating only and func-  
tional operation of the device under these condi-  
tions is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect device  
reliability.  
9.2.1 Voltage Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Maximum value  
6.5  
Unit  
V
- V  
Supply voltage  
DD  
SS  
V
1) & 2)  
V
Input voltage on any pin  
VSS-0.3 to VDD+0.3  
IN  
V
Electro-static discharge voltage (Human Body Model)  
Electro-static discharge voltage (Machine Model)  
see Section 9.7.2 Absolute Electri-  
cal Sensitivity  
ESD(HBM)  
V
ESD(MM)  
9.2.2 Current Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Maximum value  
Unit  
3)  
3)  
I
Total current into V power lines (source)  
80  
80  
VDD  
DD  
I
Total current out of V ground lines (sink)  
SS  
VSS  
Output current sunk by any standard I/O and control pin  
Output current sunk by any high sink I/O pin  
Output current source by any I/Os and control pin  
Injected current on ISPSEL pin  
25  
I
50  
IO  
- 25  
± 5  
± 5  
± 5  
± 5  
± 20  
mA  
Injected current on RESET pin  
2) & 4)  
I
INJ(PIN)  
Injected current on OSC1 and OSC2 pins  
5) & 6)  
Injected current on any other pin  
2)  
5)  
ΣI  
Total injected current (sum of all I/O and control pins)  
INJ(PIN)  
9.2.3 Thermal Characteristics  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Value  
Unit  
T
Storage temperature range  
-65 to +150  
°C  
STG  
Maximum junction temperature  
(see Section 10.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS )  
T
J
Notes:  
1. Directly connecting the RESET and I/O pins to V or V could damage the device if an unintentional internal reset  
DD  
SS  
is generated or an unexpected change of the I/O configuration occurs (for example, due to a corrupted program counter).  
To guarantee safe operation, this connection has to be done through a pull-up or pull-down resistor (typical: 4.7kfor  
RESET, 10kfor I/Os). Unused I/O pins must be tied in the same way to V or V according to their reset configuration.  
DD  
SS  
2. When the current limitation is not possible, the V absolute maximum rating must be respected, otherwise refer to  
IN  
I
specification. A positive injection is induced by V >V while a negative injection is induced by V <V  
.
INJ(PIN)  
IN  
DD  
IN  
SS  
3. All power (V ) and ground (V ) lines must always be connected to the external supply.  
DD  
SS  
4. Negative injection disturbs the analog performance of the device. In particular, it induces leakage currents throughout  
the device including the analog inputs. To avoid undesirable effects on the analog functions, care must be taken:  
- Analog input pins must have a negative injection less than 0.8 mA (assuming that the impedance of the analog voltage  
is lower than the specified limits)  
- Pure digital pins must have a negative injection less than 1.6mA. In addition, it is recommended to inject the current as  
far as possible from the analog input pins.  
5. When several inputs are submitted to a current injection, the maximum ΣI  
is the absolute sum of the positive  
INJ(PIN)  
and negative injected currents (instantaneous values). These results are based on characterisation with ΣI  
maxi-  
INJ(PIN)  
mum current injection on four I/O port pins of the device.  
6. True open drain I/O port pins do not accept positive injection.  
113/152  
ST72C171  
9.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS  
9.3.1 General Operating Conditions  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Supply voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
5.5  
16  
8
Unit  
V
see Figure 59 and Figure 60  
3.2  
V
DD  
1)  
V
V
4.5V  
3.0V  
0
DD  
DD  
f
External clock frequency  
MHz  
OSC  
1)  
0
T
Ambient temperature range  
-40  
85  
°C  
A
Figure 59. f  
Maximum Operating Frequency Versus VDD Supply Voltage for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY NOT GUARANTEED IN THIS AREA  
3)  
FOR TEMPERATURE HIGHER THAN 85°C  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
2)  
16  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
8
4
1)  
WITH RESONATOR  
1
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
3
3.2  
3.5  
3.85  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Notes:  
1. Guaranteed by construction. A/D operation and resonator oscillator start-up are not guaranteed below 1MHz.  
3. FLASH programming tested in production at maximum T with two different conditions: V =5.5V, f =8MHz and  
A
DD  
CPU  
V
=3V, f  
=4MHz.  
DD  
CPU  
114/152  
ST72C171  
OPERATING CONDITIONS (Cont’d)  
9.3.2 Operating Conditions with Low Voltage Detector (LVD)  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T .  
A
DD OSC  
Conditions  
High Threshold  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
2)  
4.10  
3.75  
3.25  
4.30  
3.90  
3.35  
4.50  
4.05  
3.45  
Reset release threshold  
2)  
2)  
V
Med. Threshold  
Low Threshold  
IT+  
(V rise)  
DD  
V
2)  
2)  
High Threshold  
Med. Threshold  
Low Threshold  
3.85  
3.50  
4.05  
3.65  
3.10  
4.25  
3.80  
3.20  
Reset generation threshold  
V
V
IT-  
(V fall)  
4)  
DD  
3.00  
200  
0.2  
LVD voltage threshold hysteresis  
V
-V  
250  
300  
50  
mV  
V/ms  
ns  
hyst  
IT+ IT-  
3)  
Vt  
V
rise time rate  
POR  
DD  
2)  
t
Filtered glitch delay on V  
Not detected by the LVD  
40  
g(VDD)  
DD  
3)  
Figure 60. High LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY AND RESET NOT GUARANTEED IN THIS AREA  
FOR TEMPERATURES HIGHER THAN 85°C  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
V
3.85  
IT-  
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3)  
Figure 61. Medium LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY AND RESET NOT GUARANTEED IN THIS AREA  
FOR TEMPERATURES HIGHER THAN 85°C  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
3
V
IT-3.5V  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
2)4)  
Figure 62. Low LVD Threshold Versus VDD and f  
for FLASH devices  
OSC  
FUNCTIONALITY NOT GUARANTEED IN THIS AREA  
FOR TEMPERATURES HIGHER THAN 85°C  
f
[MHz]  
FUNCTIONALITY  
NOT GUARANTEED  
IN THIS AREA  
OSC  
16  
DEVICE UNDER  
RESET  
IN THIS AREA  
FUNCTIONAL AREA  
8
0
SUPPLY VOLTAGE [V]  
2.5  
V
IT-3  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Notes:  
1. LVD typical data are based on T =25°C. They are given only as design guidelines and are not tested.  
A
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
3. The V rise time rate condition is needed to insure a correct device power-on and LVD reset. Not tested in production.  
DD  
4. If the low LVD threshold is selected, when V  
falls below 3.2V, (V  
minimum operating voltage), the device is guar-  
DD  
DD  
DD  
anteed to continue functioning until it goes into reset state. The specified V  
min. value is necessary in the device power  
on phase, but during a power down phase or voltage drop the device will function below this min. level.  
115/152  
ST72C171  
9.4 SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS  
The following current consumption specified for  
the ST7 functional operating modes over tempera-  
ture range does not take into account the clock  
source current consumption. To get the total de-  
vice consumption, the two current values must be  
added (except for HALT mode for which the clock  
is stopped).  
Symbol  
I  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Max  
Unit  
Supply current variation vs. temperature  
Constant V and f  
10  
%
DD(Ta)  
DD  
CPU  
9.4.1 RUN and SLOW Modes  
1)  
2)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
500  
1500  
5600  
900  
2500  
9000  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=500kHz  
=2MHz  
=8MHz  
3)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in RUN mode  
(see Figure 63)  
=4MHz, f  
CPU  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
150  
250  
670  
450  
550  
1250  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=31.25kHz  
=125kHz  
=500kHz  
4)  
4)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in SLOW mode  
(see Figure 64)  
=4MHz, f  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
CPU  
I
µA  
DD  
300  
970  
3600  
550  
1350  
4500  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=500kHz  
=2MHz  
=8MHz  
3)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in RUN mode  
(see Figure 63)  
=4MHz, f  
CPU  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
100  
170  
420  
250  
300  
700  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=31.25kHz  
=125kHz  
=500kHz  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in SLOW mode  
(see Figure 64)  
=4MHz, f  
CPU  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
Figure 63. Typical IDD in RUN vs. fCPU  
Figure 64. Typical I in SLOW vs. f  
DD  
CPU  
IDD [mA]  
0.8  
IDD [mA]  
7
500kHz  
250kHz  
125kHz  
31.25kHz  
8MHz  
4MHz  
2MHz  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
500kHz  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VDD [V]  
VDD [V]  
Notes:  
1. Typical data are based on T =25°C, V =5V (4.5VV 5.5V range) and V =3.4V (3.2VV 3.6V range).  
A
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
DD  
CPU  
3. CPU running with memory access, all I/O pins in output mode with a static value at V or V (no load), all peripherals  
DD  
SS  
in reset state; clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD disabled.  
4. SLOW mode selected with f  
SS  
based on f  
divided by 32. All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V or  
OSC DD  
CPU  
V
(no load), all peripherals in reset state; clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD disabled.  
116/152  
ST72C171  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.4.2 WAIT and SLOW WAIT Modes  
1)  
2)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
150  
560  
2200  
280  
900  
3000  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=500kHz  
=2MHz  
=8MHz  
3)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in WAIT mode  
(see Figure 65)  
=4MHz, f  
CPU  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
20  
90  
340  
70  
190  
850  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=31.25kHz  
=125kHz  
=500kHz  
4)  
4)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in SLOW WAIT mode  
(see Figure 66)  
=4MHz, f  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
CPU  
I
µA  
DD  
90  
350  
1370  
200  
550  
1900  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=500kHz  
=2MHz  
=8MHz  
3)  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in WAIT mode  
=4MHz, f  
CPU  
(see Figure 65)  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
10  
50  
200  
20  
80  
350  
f
f
f
=1MHz, f  
=31.25kHz  
=125kHz  
=500kHz  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
CPU  
Supply current in SLOW WAIT mode  
(see Figure 66)  
=4MHz, f  
CPU  
=16MHz, f  
CPU  
Figure 65. Typical I in WAIT vs. f  
Figure 66. Typical I in SLOW-WAIT vs. f  
DD  
CPU  
DD  
CPU  
IDD [mA]  
3
IDD [mA]  
0.35  
8MHz  
4MHz  
2MHz  
500kHz  
500kHz  
250kHz  
125kHz  
31.25kHz  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.15  
0.1  
0.5  
0
0.05  
0
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VDD [V]  
VDD [V]  
Notes:  
1. Typical data are based on T =25°C, V =5V (4.5VV 5.5V range) and V =3.4V (3.2VV 3.6V range).  
A
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
DD  
CPU  
3. All I/O pins in output mode with a static value at V or V (no load), all peripherals in reset state; clock input (OSC1)  
DD  
SS  
driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD disabled.  
4. SLOW-WAIT mode selected with f  
based on f  
divided by 32. All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at  
OSC  
CPU  
V
or V (no load), all peripherals in reset state; clock input (OSC1) driven by external square wave, CSS and LVD  
DD  
SS  
disabled.  
117/152  
ST72C171  
SUPPLY CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.4.3 HALT Mode  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
=5.5V -40°CT +85°C  
Typ  
Max  
10  
6
Unit  
V
V
0
µA  
DD  
A
2)  
I
Supply current in HALT mode  
DD  
=3.6V -40°CT +85°C  
DD  
A
9.4.4 Supply and Clock Managers  
The previous current consumption specified for  
the ST7 functional operating modes over tempera-  
ture range does not take into account the clock  
source current consumption. To get the total de-  
vice consumption, the two current values must be  
added (except for HALT mode).  
1)  
3)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Supply current of internal RC oscillator  
Supply current of external RC oscillator  
500  
525  
750  
750  
4)  
200  
300  
450  
700  
400  
550  
750  
LP: Low power oscillator  
I
DD(CK)  
MP: Medium power oscillator  
MS: Medium speed oscillator  
HS: High speed oscillator  
4) & 5)  
Supply current of resonator oscillator  
µA  
1000  
Clock security system supply current  
LVD supply current  
150  
100  
350  
150  
I
HALT mode  
DD(LVD)  
9.4.5 On-Chip Peripherals  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Typ  
50  
Unit  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
=3.4V  
=5.0V  
=3.4V  
=5.0V  
=3.4V  
=5.0V  
=3.4V  
=5.0V  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
DD  
6)  
I
16-bit Timer supply current  
f
f
f
f
=8MHz  
=8MHz  
=8MHz  
=4MHz  
DD(TIM)  
CPU  
CPU  
CPU  
ADC  
150  
250  
350  
250  
350  
800  
1100  
7)  
I
SPI supply current  
DD(SPI)  
µA  
2
8)  
I
I C supply current  
DD(I2C)  
9)  
I
ADC supply current when converting  
DD(ADC)  
Notes:  
1. Typical data are based on T =25°C.  
A
2. All I/O pins in input mode with a static value at V or V (no load), CSS and LVD disabled. Data based on charac-  
DD  
SS  
CPU  
terization results, tested in production at V max. and f  
max.  
DD  
3. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
4. Data based on characterization results done with the external components specified in Section 9.5.3 and Section 9.5.4,  
not tested in production.  
5. As the oscillator is based on a current source, the consumption does not depend on the voltage.  
6. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration (timer counter running at f  
/4) and timer  
DD  
CPU  
counter stopped (selecting external clock capability). Data valid for one timer.  
7. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration and a permanent SPI master communica-  
DD  
tion (data sent equal to 55h).  
8. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration and I2C peripheral enabled (PE bit set).  
DD  
9. Data based on a differential I measurement between reset configuration and continuous A/D conversions.  
DD  
118/152  
ST72C171  
9.5 CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T .  
DD OSC  
A
9.5.1 General Timings  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
2
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
tCPU  
ns  
3
12  
1500  
22  
t
Instruction cycle time  
c(INST)  
f
f
=8MHz  
250  
10  
375  
CPU  
2)  
tCPU  
µs  
Interrupt reaction time  
t
v(IT)  
t
= t  
+ 10  
=8MHz  
1.25  
2.75  
v(IT)  
c(INST)  
CPU  
9.5.2 External Clock Source  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
0.7xV  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
OSC1 input pin high level voltage  
OSC1 input pin low level voltage  
V
DD  
OSC1H  
DD  
SS  
V
V
V
0.3xV  
OSC1L  
DD  
t
t
3)  
w(OSC1H)  
see Figure 67  
OSC1 high or low time  
15  
w(OSC1L)  
ns  
t
t
3)  
r(OSC1)  
OSC1 rise or fall time  
15  
f(OSC1)  
I
OSCx Input leakage current  
V
V V  
DD  
±1  
µA  
L
SS  
IN  
Figure 67. Typical Application with an External Clock Source  
90%  
V
V
OSC1H  
OSC1L  
10%  
t
t
w(OSC1H)  
t
t
w(OSC1L)  
f(OSC1)  
r(OSC1)  
OSC2  
Not connected internally  
f
OSC  
EXTERNAL  
CLOCK SOURCE  
I
L
OSC1  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Data based on typical application software.  
2. Time measured between interrupt event and interrupt vector fetch. tc(INST) is the number of tCPU cycles needed to finish  
the current instruction execution.  
3. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.  
119/152  
ST72C171  
CLOCK AND TIMING CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.5.3 Crystal and Ceramic Resonator Oscillators  
The ST7 internal clock can be supplied with four  
different Crystal/Ceramic resonator oscillators. All  
the information given in this paragraph are based  
on characterization results with specified typical  
external componants. In the application, the reso-  
nator and the load capacitors have to be placed as  
close as possible to the oscillator pins in order to  
minimize output distortion and start-up stabiliza-  
tion time. Refer to the crystal/ceramic resonator  
manufacturer for more details (frequency, pack-  
age, accuracy...).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
MHz  
kΩ  
LP: Low power oscillator  
1
2
4
8
MP: Medium power oscillator  
MS: Medium speed oscillator  
HS: High speed oscillator  
>2  
>4  
>8  
3)  
f
Oscillator Frequency  
OSC  
16  
R
Feedback resistor  
20  
40  
F
R =200Ω  
LP oscillator  
MP oscillator  
MS oscillator  
HS oscillator  
38  
32  
18  
15  
56  
46  
26  
21  
S
Recommanded load capacitances ver-  
sus equivalent serial resistance of the  
C
C
R =200Ω  
L1  
L2  
S
pF  
R =200Ω  
S
crystal or ceramic resonator (R )  
S
R =100Ω  
S
V
=5V  
LP oscillator  
MP oscillator  
MS oscillator  
HS oscillator  
40  
50  
100  
250  
130  
300  
550  
820  
DD  
V =V  
IN  
SS  
i
OSC2 driving current  
µA  
2
Typical Crystal or Ceramic Resonators  
C
C
L2  
t
L1  
SU(osc)  
Oscil.  
2)  
1)  
[ms]  
[pF] [pF]  
Reference  
Freq.  
2MHz  
4MHz  
8MHz  
16MHz  
2MHz  
4MHz  
8MHz  
16MHz  
Characteristic  
LP  
MP  
MS  
HS  
LP  
S-200-30-30/50  
SS3-400-30-30/30  
SS3-800-30-30/30  
SS3-1600-30-30/30  
CSA2.00MG  
f  
f  
f  
f  
f  
f  
f  
f  
=[±30ppm  
=[±30ppm  
=[±30ppm  
=[±30ppm  
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =200Ω  
33 34 10~15  
33 34 7~10  
33 34 2.5~3  
33 34 1~1.5  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
OSC  
25°C  
25°C  
Ta  
S
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =60Ω  
Ta  
S
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =25Ω  
25°C  
Ta  
S
,±30ppm ], Typ. R =15Ω  
25°C  
Ta  
S
=[±0.5%  
=[±0.5%  
=[±0.5%  
=[±0.5%  
,±0.3% ,±0.3%  
,±x.x%  
,±x.x%  
,±x.x%  
,±x.x%  
]
]
]
]
33 30  
33 30  
33 30  
33 30  
4.2  
2.1  
1.1  
0.7  
tolerance  
tolerance  
tolerance  
tolerance  
Ta  
aging  
aging  
aging  
aging  
correl  
correl  
correl  
correl  
MP  
MS  
HS  
CSA4.00MG  
,±0.3% ,±0.3%  
Ta  
CSA8.00MTZ  
,±0.5% ,±0.3%  
Ta  
CSA16.00MXZ040  
,±0.3% ,±0.3%  
Ta  
Figure 68. Typical Application with a Crystal or Ceramic Resonator  
WHEN RESONATOR WITH  
INTEGRATED CAPACITORS  
i
2
f
OSC  
C
L1  
OSC1  
OSC2  
RESONATOR  
R
F
C
L2  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Resonator characteristics given by the crystal/ceramic resonator manufacturer.  
2. t is the typical oscillator start-up time measured between V =2.8V and the fetch of the first instruction (with a  
SU(OSC)  
DD  
quick V ramp-up from 0 to 5V (<50µs).  
DD  
3. The oscillator selection can be optimized in terms of supply current using an high quality resonator with small R value.  
S
Refer to crystal/ceramic resonator manufacturer for more details.  
120/152  
ST72C171  
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.5.4 RC Oscillators  
The ST7 internal clock can be supplied with an RC  
oscillator. This oscillator can be used with internal  
or external components (selectable by option  
byte).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
see Figure 69  
Min  
3.60  
1
Typ  
Max  
5.10  
14  
Unit  
1)  
Internal RC oscillator frequency  
f
t
MHz  
OSC  
2)  
External RC oscillator frequency  
Internal RC Oscillator Start-up Time  
3)  
2.0  
R
R
R
R
=47KΩ, C =”0”pF  
1.0  
6.5  
0.7  
3.0  
EX  
EX  
EX  
EX  
EX  
ms  
=47KΩ, C =100pF  
SU(OSC)  
3)  
EX  
External RC Oscillator Start-up Time  
=10KΩ, C =6.8pF  
EX  
=10KΩ, C =470pF  
EX  
4)  
R
C
Oscillator external resistor  
10  
47  
KΩ  
EX  
EX  
see Figure 70  
5)  
Oscillator external capacitor  
0
470  
pF  
Figure 69. Typical Application with RC oscillator  
ST72XXX  
V
DD  
INTERNAL RC  
Current copy  
EXTERNAL RC  
+
-
V
f
REF  
OSC  
R
EX  
OSC1  
OSC2  
C
EX  
Voltage generator  
CEX discharge  
Figure 70. Typical Internal RC Oscillator  
Figure 71. Typical External RC Oscillator  
fosc [MHz]  
fosc [MHz]  
Rex=10KOhm  
-40°C  
+25°C  
+85°C  
20  
15  
10  
5
4.25  
4.2  
Rex=15KOhm  
Rex=22KOhm  
Rex=33KOhm  
Rex=39KOhm  
Rex=47KOhm  
4.15  
4.1  
4.05  
4
3.95  
3.9  
3.85  
0
3.2  
5.5  
0
6.8  
22  
47  
100  
270  
470  
VDD [V]  
Cex [pF]  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results.  
2. Guaranteed frequency range with the specified C and R ranges taking into account the device process variation.  
EX  
EX  
Data based on design simulation.  
3. Data based on characterization results done with V nominal at 5V, not tested in production.  
DD  
4. R must have a positive temperature coefficient (ppm/°C), carbon resistors should therefore not be used.  
EX  
5. Important: when no external C is applied, the capacitance to be considered is the global parasitic capacitance which  
EX  
is subject to high variation (package, application...). In this case, the RC oscillator frequency tuning has to be done by  
trying out several resistor values.  
121/152  
ST72C171  
CLOCK CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.5.5 Clock Security System (CSS)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
T =25°C, V =5.0V  
Min  
250  
190  
Typ  
340  
260  
30  
Max  
430  
330  
Unit  
kHz  
A
DD  
1)  
f
Safe Oscillator Frequency  
SFOSC  
GFOSC  
T =25°C, V =3.4V  
A
DD  
2)  
f
Glitch Filtered Frequency  
MHz  
Figure 72. Typical Safe Oscillator Frequencies  
fosc [kH
-40°C  
+25°C  
+85°C  
400  
350  
300  
250  
200  
3.2  
5.5  
VDD [V]  
Note:  
1. Data based on characterization results, tested in production between 90KHz and 500KHz.  
2. Filtered glitch on the f signal. See functional description in section 4.3 on page 21 for more details.  
OSC  
122/152  
ST72C171  
9.6 MEMORY CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD OSC  
A
9.6.1 RAM and Hardware Registers  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
1)  
V
Data retention mode  
HALT mode (or RESET)  
1.6  
V
RM  
9.6.2 FLASH Program Memory  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
25  
8
Max  
70  
Unit  
°C  
2)  
0
T
Programming temperature range  
Programming time for 1~16 bytes  
A(prog)  
3)  
T =+25°C  
25  
ms  
A
t
prog  
T =+25°C  
2.1  
6.4  
Programming time for 4 or 8kBytes  
sec  
A
5)  
4)  
t
Data retention  
T =+55°C  
20  
years  
cycles  
ret  
A
5)  
N
Write erase cycles  
T =+25°C  
100  
RW  
A
Notes:  
1. Minimum V  
supply voltage without losing data stored in RAM (in in HALT mode or under RESET) or in hardware  
DD  
registers (only in HALT mode). Guaranteed by construction, not tested in production.  
2. Data based on characterization results, tested in production at T =25°C.  
A
3. Up to 16 bytes can be programmed at a time for a 4kBytes FLASH block (then up to 32 bytes at a time for an 8k device)  
4. The data retention time increases when the T decreases.  
A
5. Data based on reliability test results and monitored in production.  
123/152  
ST72C171  
9.7 EMC CHARACTERISTICS  
Susceptibility tests are performed on a sample ba-  
sis during product characterization.  
– ESD: Electro-Static Discharge (positive and neg-  
ative) is applied on all pins of the device until a  
functional disturbance occurs. This test con-  
forms with the IEC 1000-4-2 standard.  
9.7.1 Functional EMS  
(Electro Magnetic Susceptibility)  
– FTB: A Burst of Fast Transient voltage (positive  
Based on a simple running application on the  
product (toggling 2 LEDs through I/O ports), the  
product is stressed by two electro magnetic events  
until a failure occurs (indicated by the LEDs).  
and negative) is applied to V and V through  
DD  
SS  
a 100pF capacitor, until a functional disturbance  
occurs. This test conforms with the IEC 1000-4-  
4 standard.  
A device reset allows normal operations to be re-  
sumed.  
1)  
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
=5V, T =+25°C, f  
conforms to IEC 1000-4-2  
Neg  
Pos  
Unit  
Voltage limits to be applied on any I/O pin  
to induce a functional disturbance  
V
=8MHz  
OSC  
DD  
A
V
-1  
1
FESD  
kV  
Fast transient voltage burst limits to be ap-  
V
=5V, T =+25°C, f  
=8MHz  
OSC  
DD  
A
V
plied through 100pF on V and V pins  
-4  
4
FFTB  
DD  
DD  
conforms to IEC 1000-4-4  
to induce a functional disturbance  
2)  
Figure 73. EMC Recommended star network power supply connection  
ST72XXX  
10nF 0.1µF  
V
V
DD  
SS  
ST7  
DIGITAL NOISE  
FILTERING  
V
DD  
POWER  
SUPPLY  
SOURCE  
V
V
SSA  
DDA  
EXTERNAL  
NOISE  
FILTERING  
0.1µF  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
2. The suggested 10nF and 0.1µF decoupling capacitors on the power supply lines are proposed as a good price vs. EMC  
performance tradeoff. They have to be put as close as possible to the device power supply pins. Other EMC recommen-  
dations are given in other sections (I/Os, RESET, OSCx pin characteristics).  
124/152  
ST72C171  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.7.2 Absolute Electrical Sensitivity  
Machine Model Test Sequence  
Based on three different tests (ESD, LU and DLU)  
using specific measurement methods, the product  
is stressed in order to determine its performance in  
terms of electrical sensitivity. For more details, re-  
fer to the AN1181 ST7 application note.  
– C is loaded through S1 by the HV pulse gener-  
ator.  
L
– S1 switches position from generator to ST7.  
– A discharge from C to the ST7 occurs.  
L
– S2 must be closed 10 to 100ms after the pulse  
delivery period to ensure the ST7 is not left in  
charge state. S2 must be opened at least 10ms  
prior to the delivery of the next pulse.  
9.7.2.1 Electro-Static Discharge (ESD)  
Electro-Static Discharges (3 positive then 3 nega-  
tive pulses separated by 1 second) are applied to  
the pins of each sample according to each pin  
combination. The sample size depends of the  
number of supply pins of the device (3 parts*(n+1)  
supply pin). Two models are usually simulated:  
Human Body Model and Machine Model. This test  
conforms to the JESD22-A114A/A115A standard.  
See Figure 74 and the following test sequences.  
– R (machine resistance), in series with S2, en-  
sures a slow discharge of the ST7.  
Human Body Model Test Sequence  
– C is loaded through S1 by the HV pulse gener-  
L
ator.  
– S1 switches position from generator to R.  
– A discharge from C through R (body resistance)  
L
to the ST7 occurs.  
– S2 must be closed 10 to 100ms after the pulse  
delivery period to ensure the ST7 is not left in  
charge state. S2 must be opened at least 10ms  
prior to the delivery of the next pulse.  
Absolute Maximum Ratings  
1)  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Conditions  
Maximum value  
Unit  
Electro-static discharge voltage  
(Human Body Model)  
T =+25°C  
V
2000  
A
ESD(HBM)  
V
Electro-static discharge voltage  
(Machine Model)  
T =+25°C  
V
200  
A
ESD(MM)  
Figure 74. Typical Equivalent ESD Circuits  
S1  
R=1500Ω  
S1  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
PULSE  
GENERATOR  
HIGH VOLTAGE  
PULSE  
GENERATOR  
ST7  
ST7  
C =100pF  
S2  
L
S2  
C =200pF  
L
HUMAN BODY MODEL  
MACHINE MODEL  
Notes:  
1. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
125/152  
ST72C171  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.7.2.2 Static and Dynamic Latch-Up  
– DLU: Electro-Static Discharges (one positive  
then one negative test) are applied to each pin of  
3 samples when the micro is running to assess  
the latch-up performance in dynamic mode.  
Power supplies are set to the typical values, the  
oscillator is connected as near as possible to the  
pins of the micro and the component is put in re-  
set mode. This test conforms to the IEC1000-4-2  
and SAEJ1752/3 standards and is described in  
Figure 75. For more details, refer to the AN1181  
ST7 application note.  
– LU: 3 complementary static tests are required on  
10 parts to assess the latch-up performance. A  
supply overvoltage (applied to each power sup-  
ply pin), a current injection (applied to each input,  
output and configurable I/O pin) and a power  
supply switch sequence are performed on each  
sample. This test conforms to the EIA/JESD 78  
IC latch-up standard. For more details, refer to  
the AN1181 ST7 application note.  
Electrical Sensitivities  
1)  
Symbol  
LU  
Parameter  
Static latch-up class  
Dynamic latch-up class  
Conditions  
Class  
T =+25°C  
A
A
A
T =+85°C  
A
V
=5.5V, f  
=4MHz, T =+25°C  
DLU  
A
DD  
OSC  
A
Figure 75. Simplified Diagram of the ESD Generator for DLU  
R
=50MΩ  
R =330Ω  
D
CH  
DISCHARGE TIP  
V
V
DD  
SS  
HV RELAY  
C =150pF  
S
ST7  
ESD  
2)  
DISCHARGE  
RETURN CONNECTION  
GENERATOR  
Notes:  
1. Class description: A Class is an STMicroelectronics internal specification. All its limits are higher than the JEDEC spec-  
ifications, that means when a device belongs to Class A it exceeds the JEDEC standard. B Class strictly covers all the  
JEDEC criteria (international standard).  
2. Schaffner NSG435 with a pointed test finger.  
126/152  
ST72C171  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.7.3 ESD Pin Protection Strategy  
Standard Pin Protection  
To protect an integrated circuit against Electro-  
Static Discharge the stress must be controlled to  
prevent degradation or destruction of the circuit el-  
ements. The stress generally affects the circuit el-  
ements which are connected to the pads but can  
also affect the internal devices when the supply  
pads receive the stress. The elements to be pro-  
tected must not receive excessive current, voltage  
or heating within their structure.  
To protect the output structure the following ele-  
ments are added:  
– A diode to V (3a) and a diode from V (3b)  
DD  
SS  
– A protection device between V and V (4)  
DD  
SS  
To protect the input structure the following ele-  
ments are added:  
– A resistor in series with the pad (1)  
– A diode to V (2a) and a diode from V (2b)  
DD  
SS  
– A protection device between V and V (4)  
DD  
SS  
An ESD network combines the different input and  
output ESD protections. This network works, by al-  
lowing safe discharge paths for the pins subjected  
to ESD stress. Two critical ESD stress cases are  
presented in Figure 76 and Figure 77 for standard  
pins and in Figure 78 and Figure 79 for true open  
drain pins.  
Figure 76. Positive Stress on a Standard Pad vs. V  
SS  
V
V
DD  
DD  
(3a)  
(3b)  
(2a)  
(1)  
(4)  
OUT  
IN  
Main path  
(2b)  
Path to avoid  
V
V
V
SS  
SS  
Figure 77. Negative Stress on a Standard Pad vs. V  
DD  
V
DD  
DD  
(3a)  
(3b)  
(2a)  
(1)  
(4)  
OUT  
IN  
Main path  
(2b)  
V
V
SS  
SS  
127/152  
ST72C171  
EMC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
True Open Drain Pin Protection  
Multisupply Configuration  
When several types of ground (V , V  
The centralized protection (4) is not involved in the  
discharge of the ESD stresses applied to true  
open drain pads due to the fact that a P-Buffer and  
, ...) and  
SSA  
SS  
power supply (V , V  
, ...) are available for any  
DD  
DDA  
reason (better noise immunity...), the structure  
shown in Figure 80 is implemented to protect the  
device against ESD.  
diode to V  
local protection between the pad and V  
are not implemented. An additional  
DD  
(5a &  
SS  
5b) is implemented to completly absorb the posi-  
tive ESD discharge.  
Figure 78. Positive Stress on a True Open Drain Pad vs. V  
SS  
V
V
DD  
DD  
Main path  
(1)  
Path to avoid  
OUT  
(4)  
IN  
(5a)  
(5b)  
(3b)  
(2b)  
V
V
SS  
SS  
Figure 79. Negative Stress on a True Open Drain Pad vs. V  
DD  
V
V
DD  
DD  
Main path  
(1)  
OUT  
(4)  
IN  
(3b)  
(3b)  
(3b)  
(2b)  
V
V
SS  
SS  
Figure 80. Multisupply Configuration  
V
DD  
V
DDA  
V
DDA  
V
SS  
BACK TO BACK DIODE  
BETWEEN GROUNDS  
V
SSA  
V
SSA  
128/152  
ST72C171  
9.8 I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS  
9.8.1 General Characteristics  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD OSC  
A
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
2)  
V
Input low level voltage  
0.3xVDD  
IL  
2)  
V
Input high level voltage  
0.7xVDD  
IH  
3)  
V
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis  
Input leakage current  
400  
mV  
µA  
hys  
I
V
SSV V  
DD  
±1  
L
IN  
4)  
I
Static current consumption  
Floating input mode  
200  
250  
230  
S
V
V
=5V  
70  
120  
200  
5
DD  
DD  
5)  
R
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor  
V =V  
SS  
kΩ  
pF  
ns  
PU  
IN  
=3.3V  
170  
C
I/O pin capacitance  
IO  
6)  
t
Output high to low level fall time  
25  
C =50pF  
Between 10% and 90%  
f(IO)out  
r(IO)out  
L
6)  
t
Output low to high level rise time  
25  
7)  
t
External interrupt pulse time  
1
t
CPU  
w(IT)in  
Figure 81. Two typical Applications with unused I/O Pin  
V
DD  
ST72XXX  
UNUSED I/O PORT  
10kΩ  
10kΩ  
UNUSED I/O PORT  
ST72XXX  
Figure 82. Typical I vs. V with V =V  
SS  
PU  
DD  
IN  
Ipu [µA]  
70  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Notes:  
1. Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based on T =25°C and V =5V.  
A
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
3. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels. Based on characterization results, not tested.  
4. Configuration not recommended, all unused pins must be kept at a fixed voltage: using the output mode of the I/O for  
example or an external pull-up or pull-down resistor (see Figure 81). Data based on design simulation and/or technology  
characteristics, not tested in production.  
5. The R  
pull-up equivalent resistor is based on a resistive transistor (corresponding I current characteristics de-  
PU  
PU  
scribed in Figure 82). This data is based on characterization results, tested in production at V max.  
DD  
6. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
7. To generate an external interrupt, a minimum pulse width has to be applied on an I/O port pin configured as an external  
interrupt source.  
129/152  
ST72C171  
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.8.2 Output Driving Current  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD OSC  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Output low level voltage for a standard I/O pin  
when 8 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 83 and Figure 86)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
=+5mA  
=+2mA  
=+20mA  
=+8mA  
=-5mA  
=-2mA  
1.2  
IO  
IO  
IO  
IO  
IO  
IO  
0.5  
1.5  
0.6  
1)  
V
OL  
OH  
Output low level voltage for a high sink I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sunk at same time  
(see Figure 85 and Figure 87)  
V
Output high level voltage for an I/O pin  
when 4 pins are sourced at same time  
(see Figure 86 and Figure 88)  
V
V
-1.8  
DD  
2)  
V
-0.7  
DD  
Figure 83. Typical V at V =5V (standard)  
Figure 85. Typical V -V  
at V =5V  
OL  
DD  
DD OH DD  
Vol [V] at Vdd=5V  
2
Vdd-Voh [V] at Vdd=5V  
5.5  
5
Ta=-40°C Ta=25°C Ta=85°C  
1.5  
4.5  
4
1
Ta=-40°C Ta=85°C  
Ta=25°C  
3.5  
3
0.5  
0
2.5  
2
0
2
4
6
8
10  
-8  
-6  
-4  
Iio [mA]  
-2  
0
Iio [mA]  
Figure 84. Typical V at V =5V (high-sink)  
OL  
DD  
Vol [V] at Vdd=5V  
1.5  
Ta=-40°C Ta=25°C Ta=85°C  
1
0.5  
0
0
5
10  
15  
20  
25  
30  
Iio [mA]  
Notes:  
1. The I current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 9.2.2 and the sum of I  
IO  
IO  
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
.
VSS  
2. The I current sourced must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 9.2.2 and the sum of  
IO  
I
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
. True open drain I/O pins does not have V  
.
IO  
VDD  
OH  
130/152  
ST72C171  
I/O PORT PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 86. Typical V vs. V (standard I/Os)  
OL  
DD  
Ta=-40°C Ta=85°C  
Vol [V] at Iio=2mA  
0.45  
Vol [V] at Iio=5mA  
Ta=-40°C Ta=25°C Ta=85°C  
1.4  
1.3  
1.2  
1.1  
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
Ta=25°C  
0.4  
0.35  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Vdd [V]  
Figure 87. Typical V vs. V (high-sink I/Os)  
OL  
DD  
Vol [V] at Iio=8mA  
0.5  
Vol [V] at Iio=20mA  
Ta=-40°C Ta=25°C Ta=85°C  
Ta=-40°C Ta=25°C Ta=85°C  
1.4  
1.3  
1.2  
1.1  
1
0.45  
0.4  
0.35  
0.3  
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.25  
0.2  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Vdd [V]  
Figure 88. Typical V -V vs. V  
DD OH  
DD  
Vdd-Voh [V] at Iio=-2mA  
Vdd-Voh [V] at Iio=-5mA  
5
5.5  
5
4
3
2
1
0
4.5  
4
Ta=-40°C Ta=85°C  
Ta=25°C  
3.5  
Ta=-40°C Ta=85°C  
Ta=25°C  
3
2.5  
2
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.5  
4
4.5  
Vdd [V]  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
131/152  
ST72C171  
9.9 CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS  
9.9.1 Asynchronous RESET Pin  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD OSC  
A
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
V
2)  
V
Input low level voltage  
0.3xVDD  
IL  
2)  
V
Input high level voltage  
0.7xVDD  
IH  
3)  
V
Schmitt trigger voltage hysteresis  
400  
0.68  
0.28  
40  
mV  
V
hys  
4)  
I =+5mA  
0.95  
0.45  
60  
Output low level voltage  
IO  
V
V
=5V  
DD  
OL  
(see Figure 91, Figure 92)  
I =+2mA  
IO  
V
V
=5V  
20  
80  
DD  
DD  
5)  
R
Weak pull-up equivalent resistor  
V =V  
SS  
kΩ  
ON  
IN  
=3.4V  
100  
120  
External pin or  
internal reset sources  
6
30  
1/f  
SFOSC  
t
Generated reset pulse duration  
w(RSTL)out  
µs  
6)  
t
t
External reset pulse hold time  
20  
µs  
h(RSTL)in  
7)  
Filtered glitch duration  
100  
ns  
g(RSTL)in  
8)  
Figure 89. Typical Application with RESET pin  
ST72XXX  
V
DD  
V
V
DD  
DD  
INTERNAL  
RESET CONTROL  
R
ON  
0.1µF  
0.1µF  
4.7kΩ  
USER  
EXTERNAL  
RESET  
RESET  
8)  
CIRCUIT  
WATCHDOG RESET  
LVD RESET  
Notes:  
1. Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based on T =25°C and V =5V.  
A
DD  
2. Data based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
3. Hysteresis voltage between Schmitt trigger switching levels. Based on characterization results, not tested.  
4. The I current sunk must always respect the absolute maximum rating specified in Section 9.2.2 and the sum of I  
IO  
IO  
(I/O ports and control pins) must not exceed I  
.
VSS  
5. The R  
pull-up equivalent resistor is based on a resistive transistor (corresponding I  
current characteristics de-  
ON  
ON  
scribed in Figure 90). This data is based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
5. To guarantee the reset of the device, a minimum pulse has to be applied to RESET pin.  
6. All short pulse applied on RESET pin with a duration below t  
can be ignored.  
h(RSTL)in  
7. The reset network (the resistor and two capacitors) protects the device against parasitic resets, especially in a noisy  
environment.  
8. The output of the external reset circuit must have an open-drain output to drive the ST7 reset pad. Otherwise the device  
can be damaged when the ST7 generates an internal reset (LVD or watchdog).  
132/152  
ST72C171  
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 90. Typical I vs. V with V =V  
Figure 91. Typical V at V =5V (RESET)  
OL DD  
ON  
DD  
IN  
SS  
Ion [µA]  
Vol [V] at Vdd=5V  
1.5  
Ta=-40°C Ta=85°C  
Ta=25°C  
200  
Ta=-40°C  
Ta=25°C  
Ta=85°C  
150  
100  
50  
1
0.5  
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Iio [mA]  
Vdd [V]  
Figure 92. Typical V vs. V (RESET)  
OL  
DD  
Vol [V] at Iio=5mA  
Ta=-40°C Ta=85°C  
Ta=25°C  
Vol [V] at Iio=2mA  
0.45  
Ta=-40°C Ta=85°C  
Ta=25°C  
1.2  
1
0.4  
0.35  
0.3  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.25  
0.2  
0.15  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
3.2  
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
Vdd [V]  
Vdd [V]  
133/152  
ST72C171  
CONTROL PIN CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.9.2 ISPSEL Pin  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
A
DD OSC  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
V
1)  
V
Input low level voltage  
V
0.2  
IL  
IH  
L
SS  
1)  
V
I
Input high level voltage  
Input leakage current  
V
-0.1 12.6  
DD  
V =V  
±1  
µA  
IN  
SS  
2)  
Figure 93. Two typical Applications with ISPSEL Pin  
ISPSEL  
ISPSEL  
PROGRAMMING  
TOOL  
10kΩ  
ST72XXX  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Data based on design simulation and/or technology characteristics, not tested in production.  
2. When the ISP Remote mode is not required by the application ISPSEL pin must be tied to V  
.
SS  
134/152  
ST72C171  
9.10 TIMER PERIPHERAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V  
,
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on  
the input/output alternate function characteristics  
(output compare, input capture, external clock,  
PWM output...).  
DD  
f
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
OSC  
A
9.10.1 Watchdog Timer  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Watchdog time-out duration  
Conditions  
Min  
12,288  
1.54  
Typ  
Max  
786,432  
98.3  
Unit  
tCPU  
ms  
t
w(WDG)  
fCPU=8MHz  
9.10.2 8-Bit PWM Auto-reload Timer  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
1
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
t
Input capture pulse time  
t
t
w(ICAP)in  
CPU  
1
CPU  
t
PWM resolution time  
res(PWM)  
f
=8MHz  
125  
0
ns  
CPU  
f
Timer external clock frequency  
PWM repetition rate  
f
f
/2  
/2  
MHz  
MHz  
bit  
EXT  
CPU  
f
0
PWM  
CPU  
Res  
PWM resolution  
8
PWM  
9.10.3 16-Bit Timer  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
1
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
t
Input capture pulse time  
t
t
w(ICAP)in  
CPU  
2
CPU  
t
PWM resolution time  
res(PWM)  
f
=8MHz  
250  
0
ns  
CPU  
f
Timer external clock frequency  
PWM repetition rate  
f
f
/4  
MHz  
MHz  
bit  
EXT  
CPU  
f
0
/4  
CPU  
PWM  
Res  
PWM resolution  
16  
PWM  
135/152  
ST72C171  
9.11 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS  
9.11.1 SPI - Serial Peripheral Interface  
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on  
the input/output alternate function characteristics  
(SS, SCK, MOSI, MISO).  
Subject to general operating conditions for V  
,
DD  
f
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
OSC  
A
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
/128  
0.0625  
Max  
Unit  
Master  
Slave  
f
f
/4  
CPU  
2
CPU  
f
=8MHz  
=8MHz  
f
CPU  
SCK  
SPI clock frequency  
MHz  
1/t  
f
/2  
c(SCK)  
CPU  
0
f
4
CPU  
t
t
r(SCK)  
f(SCK)  
SPI clock rise and fall time  
see I/O port pin description  
t
SS setup time  
SS hold time  
Slave  
Slave  
120  
120  
su(SS)  
t
h(SS)  
t
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
90  
w(SCKH)  
SCK high and low time  
Data input setup time  
Data input hold time  
w(SCKL)  
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
100  
su(MI)  
t
su(SI)  
ns  
t
Master  
Slave  
100  
100  
h(MI)  
t
h(SI)  
t
Data output access time  
Data output disable time  
Data output valid time  
Data output hold time  
Data output valid time  
Data output hold time  
Slave  
Slave  
0
120  
240  
120  
a(SO)  
t
dis(SO)  
t
v(SO)  
h(SO)  
v(MO)  
h(MO)  
Slave (after enable edge)  
t
0
t
0.25  
0.25  
Master (before capture edge)  
t
CPU  
t
Figure 94. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=0 3)  
SS  
INPUT  
t
t
su(SS)  
c(SCK)  
t
h(SS)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
t
t
w(SCKH)  
w(SCKL)  
t
t
t
t
dis(SO)  
a(SO)  
v(SO)  
h(SO)  
t
r(SCK)  
t
f(SCK)  
see  
note 2  
MISO  
OUTPUT  
INPUT  
MSB OUT  
see note 2  
BIT6 OUT  
LSB OUT  
t
t
h(SI)  
su(SI)  
LSB IN  
MSB IN  
BIT1 IN  
MOSI  
Notes:  
1. Data based on design simulation and/or characterisation results, not tested in production.  
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has  
its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends on the I/O port configuration.  
3. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV and 0.7xV  
.
DD  
DD  
136/152  
ST72C171  
COMMUNICATION INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
Figure 95. SPI Slave Timing Diagram with CPHA=11)  
SS  
INPUT  
t
t
su(SS)  
c(SCK)  
t
h(SS)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
t
t
w(SCKH)  
w(SCKL)  
t
t
dis(SO)  
a(SO)  
t
t
h(SO)  
v(SO)  
t
t
r(SCK)  
f(SCK)  
see  
note 2  
see  
note 2  
MISO  
OUTPUT  
HZ  
MSB OUT  
BIT6 OUT  
LSB OUT  
t
t
h(SI)  
su(SI)  
MSB IN  
LSB IN  
BIT1 IN  
MOSI  
INPUT  
Figure 96. SPI Master Timing Diagram 1)  
SS  
INPUT  
t
c(SCK)  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=0  
CPOL=1  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=0  
CPHA=1  
CPOL=1  
t
w(SCKH)  
t
r(SCK)  
t
w(SCKL)  
t
f(SCK)  
t
t
h(MI)  
su(MI)  
MISO  
MOSI  
INPUT  
MSB IN  
h(MO)  
BIT6 IN  
LSB IN  
t
t
v(MO)  
MSB OUT  
LSB OUT  
see note 2  
BIT6 OUT  
see note 2  
OUTPUT  
Notes:  
1. Measurement points are done at CMOS levels: 0.3xV and 0.7xV  
.
DD  
DD  
2. When no communication is on-going the data output line of the SPI (MOSI in master mode, MISO in slave mode) has  
its alternate function capability released. In this case, the pin status depends of the I/O port configuration.  
137/152  
ST72C171  
COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
9.11.2 SCI - Serial Communications Interface  
Subject to general operating conditions for V  
Refer to I/O port characteristics for more details on  
the input/output alternate function characteristics  
(RDI and TDO).  
,
DD  
f
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
OSC  
A
Conditions  
Baud  
Rate  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Standard  
Unit  
Accuracy  
vs. Standard  
Prescaler  
f
CPU  
Conventional Mode  
TR (or RR)=64, PR=13  
TR (or RR)=16, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 8, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 4, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 2, PR=13  
TR (or RR)= 8, PR= 3  
TR (or RR)= 1, PR=13  
300  
~300.48  
1200 ~1201.92  
2400 ~2403.84  
4800 ~4807.69  
9600 ~9615.38  
10400 ~10416.67  
19200 ~19230.77  
~0.16%  
~0.79%  
f
f
Tx  
Communication frequency 8MHz  
Hz  
Rx  
Extended Mode  
ETPR (or ERPR) = 13  
38400 ~38461.54  
14400 ~14285.71  
Extended Mode  
ETPR (or ERPR) = 35  
138/152  
ST72C171  
9.12 8-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS  
Subject to general operating conditions for V , f  
, and T unless otherwise specified.  
DD OSC  
A
1)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
ADC clock frequency  
Conversion range voltage  
External input resistor  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
f
4
MHz  
ADC  
2)  
V
R
V
V
V
AIN  
AIN  
SSA  
DDA  
3)  
10  
kΩ  
pF  
C
Internal sample and hold capacitor  
Stabilization time after ADC enable  
Conversion time (Sample+Hold)  
6
ADC  
4)  
t
0
STAB  
µs  
3
f
=8MHz, f  
=4MHz  
ADC  
CPU  
t
- Sample capacitor loading time  
- Hold conversion time  
4
8
ADC  
1/f  
ADC  
Figure 97. Typical Application with ADC  
V
DD  
V
T
0.6V  
R
AIN  
AINx  
V
AIN  
ADC  
V
0.6V  
T
C
~2pF  
I
L
±1µA  
IO  
V
DD  
V
V
DDA  
SSA  
0.1µF  
ST72XXX  
Notes:  
1. Unless otherwise specified, typical data are based on T =25°C and V -V =5V. They are given only as design guide-  
A
DD SS  
lines and are not tested.  
2. When V and V  
pins are not available on the pinout, the ADC refer to V and V .  
SS  
DDA  
SSA  
DD  
3. Any added external serial resistor will downgrade the ADC accuracy (especially for resistance greater than 10k). Data  
based on characterization results, not tested in production.  
4. The stabilization time of the AD converter is masked by the first t  
always valid.  
. The first conversion after the enable is then  
LOAD  
139/152  
ST72C171  
8-BIT ADC CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
ADC Accuracy  
Symbol  
|E |  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Max  
1
Unit  
1)  
Total unadjusted error  
T
1)  
-0.5  
-0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
E
E
Offset error  
O
G
3)  
V
=5.0V,  
1)  
DD  
LSB  
Gain Error  
f
=8MHz  
CPU  
1)  
|E |  
Differential linearity error  
D
1)  
|E |  
Integral linearity error  
L
Figure 98. ADC Accuracy Characteristics  
Digital Result ADCDR  
E
G
(1) Example of an actual transfer curve  
(2) The ideal transfer curve  
(3) End point correlation line  
255  
V
V  
254  
253  
DDA  
SSA  
1LSB  
= ----------------------------------------  
IDEAL  
256  
(2)  
E =Total Unadjusted Error: maximum deviation  
T
E
between the actual and the ideal transfer curves.  
T
(3)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
E =Offset Error: deviation between the first actual  
O
transition and the first ideal one.  
(1)  
E =Gain Error: deviation between the last ideal  
G
transition and the last actual one.  
E
O
E
L
E =Differential Linearity Error: maximum deviation  
D
between actual steps and the ideal one.  
E =Integral Linearity Error: maximum deviation  
L
E
between any actual transition and the end point  
correlation line.  
D
1 LSB  
IDEAL  
V
(LSB  
)
IDEAL  
in  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
253 254 255 256  
V
V
DDA  
SSA  
Notes:  
1. ADC Accuracy vs. Negative Injection Current:  
For I =0.8mA, the typical leakage induced inside the die is 1.6µA and the effect on the ADC accuracy is a loss of 1 LSB  
INJ-  
for each 10Kincrease of the external analog source impedance. This effect on the ADC accuracy has been observed  
under worst-case conditions for injection:  
- negative injection  
- injection to an Input with analog capability, adjacent to the enabled Analog Input  
- at 5V V supply, and worst case temperature.  
DD  
3. Data based on characterization results over the whole temperature range, monitored in production.  
140/152  
ST72C171  
9.13 OP-AMP Module Characteristics  
These op-amp specific values take precedence over any generic values given elsewhere in the docu-  
ment.  
o
(T =25 C, VDD - V = 5 V ).  
SS  
SPGA1 / SPGA2 - Software Programmable Gain Operational Amplifiers  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
|Vio|  
Input Offset Voltage  
Supply Current per amplifier  
3
10  
mV  
V
load  
=5.0V, A  
=1, no  
VCL  
2)  
DD  
I
0.8  
2
mA  
1)  
CC  
3)  
CMR  
SVR  
Common Mode Rejection Ratio  
Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio  
Voltage Gain  
70  
dB  
dB  
V/mV  
V
3)  
70  
3)  
Avd  
(R =1K)  
100  
4.9  
L
V
V
High Level Ouput Voltage  
Low Level Ouput Voltage  
(R =10KΩ) V =5V  
L DD  
OH  
OL  
(R =10KΩ) V =5V  
0.10  
V
L
DD  
Short circuit Current Sourced  
Short circuit Current Sunk  
Vo= 5V connected to V  
Vo= 0V connected to V  
45  
70  
mA  
mA  
SS  
I
SC 3)  
DD  
GPB  
Gain Bandwidth Product  
4
1
1
MHz  
V/µs  
+
5)  
1)  
SR  
Slew Rate  
A
A
=1  
VCL  
-
5)  
1)  
SR  
Slew Rate  
=1  
V/µs  
VCL  
3)  
1  
en  
Thermal Noise  
Phase margin  
50  
nV Hz  
3)  
Φm  
40  
55  
10  
Degrees  
pF  
4)  
Cin  
Input Capacitance  
Common Mode Input Voltage  
Range  
V
0.2  
-
V
+0.2  
4)  
SS  
DD  
V
V
icm  
Reference Voltage (V  
step) Precision  
/8  
DDA  
VRef  
V  
±10  
%
Band Gap Precision  
±10  
±10  
%
%
BG  
Gain  
Programmable Gain Precision  
1) A  
= Closed loop gain (repeater configuration)  
VCL  
2) Tested with positve input connected to internal band gap (reference voltage enabled) and negative in-  
put floating.  
3) Data based on characterization, not tested in production  
4) Data guaranteed by design, not tested in production  
5) Slew rate is the rate of change from 10% to 90% of the output voltage step.  
141/152  
ST72C171  
OP-AMP MODULE CHARACTERISTICS (Cont’d)  
OA3 Operational Amplifier  
Symbol Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
|Vio|  
Input Offset Voltage  
3
10  
mV  
V
load  
=5.0V, A  
=1, no  
VCL  
DD  
1)  
I
Supply Current per amplifier  
300  
500  
µA  
CC  
2)  
CMR  
SVR  
Common Mode Rejection Ratio  
Supply Voltage Rejection Ratio  
Voltage Gain  
70  
dB  
dB  
V/mV  
V
2)  
70  
2)  
Avd  
(R =1K)  
100  
4.9  
L
V
High Level Ouput Voltage  
Low Level Ouput Voltage  
(R =10KΩ) V  
=5V  
=5V  
OH  
OL  
L
DDA  
V
(R =10KΩ) V  
0.10  
V
L
DDA  
Short circuit Current Sourced  
Short circuit Current Sunk  
Vo= 1 connected to V  
Vo= 0 connected to V  
45  
70  
mA  
mA  
SS  
2)  
I
SC  
DD  
GPB  
Gain Bandwidth Product  
6
1
1
MHz  
V/µs  
+
4)  
1)  
SR  
Slew Rate  
A
A
=1  
VCL  
-
4)  
1)  
SR  
Slew Rate  
=1  
V/µs  
VCL  
2)  
1  
en  
Thermal Noise  
Phase margin  
50  
nV Hz  
2)  
Φm  
40  
55  
10  
Degrees  
pF  
3)  
Cin  
Input Capacitance  
Common Mode Input Voltage  
Range  
V
0.2  
-
V
+0.2  
3)  
SS  
DD  
V
V
icm  
1) A  
= Closed loop gain (repeater configuration)  
VCL  
2) Data based on characterization, not tested in production  
3) Data guaranteed by design, not tested in production  
4) Slew rate is the rate of change from 10% to 90% of the output voltage step.  
142/152  
ST72C171  
9.13.1 Typical Phase Gain vs. Frequency  
Figure 99. Gain vs Frequency  
60  
40  
180  
150  
120  
90  
20  
0
60  
30  
0
-30  
-60  
-90  
-120  
-20  
-40  
1.00E+3  
1.00E+4  
1.00E+5  
1.00E+6  
1.00E+7  
Gain (dB)  
Phase (Deg)  
load RL=2Kohm CL= 120pF VDD=5V  
9.13.2 Typical Total Harmonic Distorsion  
average value of V /2. This signal is input to the  
SPGA configured in non-inverter mode with a gain  
of 1. The SPGA output is loaded with a 1K resistor.  
DD  
Figure 100 shows three typical curves for different  
V
values. This characterisation has been done  
A
DD  
at T 25°C using a 1 kHz sine wave signal with an  
Figure 100. Total Harmonic Distorsion vs Vout  
0.2  
0.15  
0.1  
0.05  
0
Vd d =6 V  
Vd d =5 V  
Vd d =3 V  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
VOUT pe a k-pe a k (V)  
RL =10Kohm, F= 1KHz  
143/152  
ST72C171  
10 GENERAL INFORMATION  
10.1 PACKAGE MECHANICAL DATA  
Figure 101. 32-Pin Shrink Plastic Dual In Line Package  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
A
E
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
3.56 3.76 5.08 0.140 0.148 0.200  
See Lead Detail  
A1 0.51  
A2 3.05 3.56 4.57 0.120 0.140 0.180  
0.36 0.46 0.58 0.014 0.018 0.023  
b1 0.76 1.02 1.40 0.030 0.040 0.055  
0.020  
C
b
eA  
b1  
b
C
D
E
0.20 0.25 0.36 0.008 0.010 0.014  
27.43 27.94 28.45 1.080 1.100 1.120  
9.91 10.41 11.05 0.390 0.410 0.435  
e
B
e
3
D
E1 7.62 8.89 9.40 0.300 0.350 0.370  
A
2
e
eA  
eB  
L
1.78  
0.070  
0.400  
N
10.16  
A
L
E
1
12.70  
0.500  
A
1
2.54 3.05 3.81 0.100 0.120 0.150  
e
Number of Pins  
VR01725J  
1
N/2  
N
32  
Figure 102. 34-Pin Small Outline  
mm  
inches  
Dim.  
Min Typ Max Min Typ Max  
A
2.46  
2.64 0.097  
0.29 0.005  
0.48 0.014  
0.32 0.0091  
18.06 0.698  
7.59 0.292  
0.104  
0.0115  
0.019  
0.0125  
0.711  
0.299  
A1 0.13  
B
C
D
E
e
0.36  
0.23  
0.10mm  
.004  
seating plane  
17.73  
7.42  
1.02  
0.040  
H
h
10.16  
0.64  
10.41 0.400  
0.74 0.025  
0°  
0.410  
0.029  
8°  
K
L
0.61  
1.02 0.024  
0.040  
Number of Pins  
N
34  
SO34S  
144/152  
ST72C171  
10.2 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Symbol  
Ratings  
Value  
Unit  
Package thermal resistance (junction to ambient)  
SDIP32  
SO34  
R
60  
70  
°C/W  
thJA  
1)  
P
Power dissipation  
Maximum junction temperature  
500  
150  
mW  
°C  
D
2)  
T
Jmax  
Notes:  
1. The power dissipation is obtained from the formula P =P +P  
where P  
is the chip internal power (I xV  
)
D
INT  
PORT  
INT  
DD DD  
and P  
is the port power dissipation determined by the user.  
PORT  
2. The average chip-junction temperature can be obtained from the formula T = T + P x RthJA.  
J
A
D
145/152  
ST72C171  
10.3 SOLDERING AND GLUEABILITY INFORMATION  
Recommended soldering information given only  
as design guidelines in Figure 103 and Figure 104.  
Recommended glue for SMD plastic packages  
dedicated to molding compound with silicone:  
Heraeus: PD945, PD955  
Loctite: 3615, 3298  
Figure 103. Recommended Wave Soldering Profile (with 37% Sn and 63% Pb)  
250  
COOLING PHASE  
(ROOM TEMPERATURE)  
5 sec  
200  
150  
100  
50  
SOLDERING  
PHASE  
80°C  
Temp. [°C]  
PREHEATING  
PHASE  
Time [sec]  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
120  
140  
160  
Figure 104. Recommended Reflow Soldering Oven Profile (MID JEDEC)  
250  
Tmax=220+/-5°C  
for 25 sec  
200  
150  
100  
50  
150 sec above 183°C  
90 sec at 125°C  
Temp. [°C]  
ramp down natural  
2°C/sec max  
ramp up  
2°C/sec for 50sec  
Time [sec]  
0
100  
200  
300  
400  
10.4 PACKAGE/SOCKET FOOTPRINT PROPOSAL  
Table 23. Suggested List of SDIP32 Socket Types  
Same  
Footprint  
Package / Probe  
Adaptor / Socket Reference  
Socket Type  
Textool  
SDIP32  
EMU PROBE  
TEXTOOL  
232-1291-00  
X
Table 24. Suggested List of SO34 Socket Types  
Same  
Footprint  
Package / Probe  
Adaptor / Socket Reference  
Socket Type  
N/A  
Emulator Probe includes an adapter with S034 footprint to be sol-  
dered on user PCB  
SO34 EMU PROBE  
X
146/152  
ST72C171  
0: Clock filter enabled  
1: Clock filter disabled  
11 DEVICE CONFIGURATION AND  
ORDERING INFORMATION  
The device is available for production a user pro-  
grammable version (FLASH). FLASH devices are  
shipped to customers with a default content (FFh).  
FLASH devices have to be configured by the cus-  
tomer using the Option Bytes.  
Bit 6:4 = OSC[2:0] Oscillator selection  
These three option bits can be used to select the  
main oscillator as shown in Table 25.  
Bit 3:2 = LVD[1:0] Low voltage detection selection  
These option bits enable the LVD block with a se-  
lected threshold as shown in Table 26.  
11.1 OPTION BYTES  
The two option bytes allow the hardware configu-  
ration of the microcontroller to be selected.  
The option bytes have no address in the memory  
map and can be accessed only in programming  
mode (for example using a standard ST7 program-  
ming tool). The default content of the FLASH is  
fixed to FFh.  
In masked ROM devices, the option bytes are  
fixed in hardware by the ROM code (see option  
list).  
Bit 1 = WDG HALT Watchdog and halt mode  
This option bit determines if a RESET is generated  
when entering HALT mode while the Watchdog is  
active.  
0: No Reset generation when entering Halt mode  
1: Reset generation when entering Halt mode  
Bit 0 = WDG SW Hardware or software watchdog  
This option bit selects the watchdog type.  
0: Hardware (watchdog always enabled)  
USER OPTION BYTE 0  
Bit 7:1 = Reserved, must always be 1.  
1: Software (watchdog to be enabled by software)  
Table 25. Main Oscillator Configuration  
Bit 1= OA3E Op-Amp 3 Enable  
This option bit enables or disables the third Op-  
Amp of the on-chip Op-Amp Module.  
0: OE3 disabled  
Selected Oscillator  
External Clock (Stand-by)  
~4 MHz Internal RC  
OSC2 OSC1 OSC0  
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
X
1
0
1
0
1: OE3 enabled  
1~14 MHz External RC  
Low Power Resonator (LP)  
Medium Power Resonator (MP)  
Medium Speed Resonator (MS)  
High Speed Resonator (HS)  
Bit 0 = FMP Full memory protection.  
This option bit enables or disables external access  
to the internal program memory (read-out protec-  
tion). Clearing this bit causes the erasing (to 00h)  
of the whole memory (including the option byte).  
0: Program memory not read-out protected  
1: Program memory read-out protected  
Table 26. LVD Threshold Configuration  
Configuration  
LVD1 LVD0  
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
LVD Off  
USER OPTION BYTE 1  
Highest Voltage Threshold ( 4.50V)  
Medium Voltage Threshold ( 4.05V)  
Lowest Voltage Threshold ( 3.45V)  
Bit 7 = CFC Clock filter control on/off  
This option bit enables or disables the clock filter  
(CF) features.  
USER OPTION BYTE 0  
USER OPTION BYTE 1  
7
0
7
0
OSC OSC OSC  
WDG WDG  
HALT SW  
Reserved  
OA3E FMP CFC  
LVD1 LVD0  
2
1
0
Default  
Value  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
147/152  
ST72C171  
11.2 DEVICE ORDERING INFORMATION  
Figure 105. FLASH User Programmable Device Type  
TEMP.  
PACKAGE RANGE  
DEVICE  
6= industrial -40 to +85 °C  
B= Plastic DIP  
M= Plastic SOIC  
ST72C171K2  
148/152  
ST72C171  
11.3 DEVELOPMENT TOOLS  
STmicroelectronics offers a range of hardware  
and software development tools for the ST7 micro-  
controller family. Full details of tools available for  
the ST7 from third party manufacturers can be ob-  
tain from the STMicroelectronics Internet site:  
http//mcu.st.com.  
STMicroelectronics Tools  
Two types of development tool are offered by ST,  
all of them connect to a PC via a parallel (LPT)  
port: see Table 27 and Table 28 for more details.  
Third Party Tools  
ACTUM  
BP  
COSMIC  
CMX  
DATA I/O  
HITEX  
HIWARE  
ISYSTEM  
KANDA  
LEAP  
Tools from these manufacturers include C compli-  
ers, emulators and gang programmers.  
Table 27. STMicroelectronic Tool Features  
1)  
In-Circuit Emulation  
Programming Capability  
Software Included  
ST7 CD ROM with:  
Yes, powerful emulation  
ST7 HDS2 Emulator  
features including trace/  
logic analyzer  
No  
– ST7 Assembly toolchain  
– STVD7 and WGDB7 powerful  
Source Level Debugger for Win  
3.1, Win 95 and NT  
– C compiler demo versions  
– ST Realizer for Win 3.1 and Win  
95.  
Yes (All packages),support  
also ISP  
ST7 Programming Board  
No  
1)  
– Windows Programming Tools  
for Win 3.1, Win 95 and NT  
Table 28. Dedicated STMicroelectronics Development Tools  
Supported Product  
ST7 HDS2 Emulator  
ST7 Programming Board  
ST7MDT6-EPB2/EU  
ST7MDT6-EPB2/US  
ST7MDT6-EPB2/UK  
ST7MDT6-EMU2B  
ST72C171K2,  
Note:  
1. In-Situ Programming (ISP) interface for FLASH devices.  
149/152  
ST72C171  
11.4 ST7 APPLICATION NOTES  
IDENTIFICATION  
DESCRIPTION  
PROGRAMMING AND TOOLS  
AN985  
AN986  
EXECUTING CODE IN ST7 RAM  
USING THE ST7 INDIRECT ADDRESSING MODE  
AN987  
ST7 IN-CIRCUIT PROGRAMMING  
AN988  
AN989  
STARTING WITH ST7 ASSEMBLY TOOL CHAIN  
STARTING WITH ST7 HIWARE C  
AN1039  
AN1064  
AN1106  
EXAMPLE DRIVERS  
AN969  
AN970  
AN971  
AN972  
ST7 MATH UTILITY ROUTINES  
WRITING OPTIMIZED HIWARE C LANGUAGE FOR ST7  
TRANSLATING ASSEMBLY CODE FROM HC05 TO ST7  
ST7 SCI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE ST7 AND A PC  
ST7 SPI COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE ST7 AND E²PROM  
ST7 I²C COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE ST7 AND E²PROM  
ST7 SOFTWARE SPI MASTER COMMUNICATION  
AN973  
AN974  
AN976  
AN979  
SCI SOFTWARE COMMUNICATION WITH A PC USING ST72251 16-BIT TIMER  
REAL TIME CLOCK WITH THE ST7 TIMER OUTPUT COMPARE  
DRIVING A BUZZER USING THE ST7 PWM FUNCTION  
DRIVING AN ANALOG KEYBOARD WITH THE ST7 ADC  
ST7 KEYPAD DECODING TECHNIQUES, IMPLEMENTING WAKE-UP ON KEYSTROKE  
USING THE ST7 USB MICROCONTROLLER  
USING ST7 PWM SIGNAL TO GENERATE ANALOG OUTPUT (SINUSOID)  
ST7 ROUTINE FOR I²C SLAVE MODE MANAGEMENT  
MULTIPLE INTERRUPT SOURCES MANAGEMENT FOR ST7 MCUS  
ST7 SOFTWARE IMPLEMENTATION OF I²C BUS MASTER  
ST7 UART EMULATION SOFTWARE  
MANAGING RECEPTION ERRORS WITH THE ST7 SCI PERIPHERAL  
ST7 SOFTWARE LCD DRIVER  
ST7 TIMER PWM DUTY CYCLE SWITCH FOR TRUE 0% or 100% DUTY CYCLE  
DESCRIPTION OF THE ST72141 MOTOR CONTROL  
ST72141 BLDC MOTOR CONTROL SOFTWARE AND FLOWCHART EXAMPLE  
PERMANENT MAGNET DC MOTOR DRIVE.  
BRUSHLESS DC MOTOR DRIVE WITH ST72141  
AN980  
AN1017  
AN1041  
AN1042  
AN1044  
AN1045  
AN1046  
AN1047  
AN1048  
AN1078  
AN1082  
AN1083  
AN1129  
AN1130  
AN1148  
AN1149  
AN1180  
AN1182  
USING THE ST7263 FOR DESIGNING A USB MOUSE  
HANDLING SUSPEND MODE ON A USB MOUSE  
USING THE ST7263 KIT TO IMPLEMENT A USB GAME PAD  
USING THE ST7 USB LOW-SPEED FIRMWARE  
PRODUCT OPTIMIZATION  
AN982  
USING CERAMIC RESONATORS WITH THE ST7  
AN1014  
AN1070  
AN1179  
HOW TO MINIMIZE THE ST7 POWER CONSUMPTION  
ST7 CHECKSUM SELFCHECKING CAPABILITY  
PROGRAMMING ST7 FLASH MICROCONTROLLERS IN REMOTE ISP  
PRODUCT EVALUATION  
AN910  
ST7 AND ST9 PERFORMANCE BENCHMARKING  
AN990  
ST7 BENEFITS VERSUS INDUSTRY STANDARD  
ST7 / ST10U435 CAN-do SOLUTIONS FOR CAR MULTIPLEXING  
BENCHMARK ST72 VS PC16  
AN1086  
AN1150  
AN1151  
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON BETWEEN ST72254 & PC16F8  
11.5 TO GET MORE INFORMATION  
To get the latest information on this product please use the ST web server: http://mcu.st.com/  
150/152  
ST72C171  
12 SUMMARY OF CHANGES  
Description of the changes between the current release of the specification and the previous one.  
Revision  
Main changes  
Date  
1.4  
Added Figure 99 and Figure 100.  
Oct-00  
151/152  
ST72C171  
Notes:  
Information furnished is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, STMicroelectronics assumes no responsibility for the consequences  
of use of such information nor for any infringement of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use. No license is granted  
by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of STMicroelectronics. Specifications mentioned in this publication are subject  
to change without notice. This publication supersedes and replaces all information previously supplied. STMicroelectronics products are not  
authorized for use as critical components in life support devices or systems without the express written approval of STMicroelectronics.  
The ST logo is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics  
2000 STMicroelectronics - All Rights Reserved.  
Purchase of I2C Components by STMicroelectronics conveys a license under the Philips I2C Patent. Rights to use these components in an  
I2C system is granted provided that the system conforms to the I2C Standard Specification as defined by Philips.  
STMicroelectronics Group of Companies  
Australia - Brazil - China - Finland - France - Germany - Hong Kong - India - Italy - Japan - Malaysia - Malta - Morocco - Singapore - Spain  
Sweden - Switzerland - United Kingdom - U.S.A.  
http://www.st.com  
152/152  

相关型号:

ST72C171K2

8-BIT MCU WITH 8K FLASH. ADC. WDG. SPI. SCI. TIMERS SPGAS (SOFTWARE PROGRAMMABLE GAIN AMPLIFIERS). OP-AMP
STMICROELECTR

ST72C171K2B

8-BIT MCU with 8K FLASH, ADC, WDG, SPI, SCI, TIMERS SPGAs Software Programmable Gain Amplifiers, OP-AMP
STMICROELECTR

ST72C171K2B6

8-BIT MCU with 8K FLASH, ADC, WDG, SPI, SCI, TIMERS SPGAs Software Programmable Gain Amplifiers, OP-AMP
STMICROELECTR

ST72C171K2M

8-BIT MCU with 8K FLASH, ADC, WDG, SPI, SCI, TIMERS SPGAs Software Programmable Gain Amplifiers, OP-AMP
STMICROELECTR

ST72C171K2M6

8-BIT MCU with 8K FLASH, ADC, WDG, SPI, SCI, TIMERS SPGAs Software Programmable Gain Amplifiers, OP-AMP
STMICROELECTR

ST72C215

REAL-TIME DEVELOPMENT TOOLS FOR THE ST7 MCU FAMILY
STMICROELECTR

ST72C215G2

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, I2C INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72C215G2B1

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, IC INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72C215G2B3

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, IC INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72C215G2B5

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, IC INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72C215G2B6

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, IC INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR

ST72C215G2B7

8-BIT MCU WITH SINGLE VOLTAGE FLASH MEMORY, ADC, 16-BIT TIMERS, SPI, IC INTERFACES
STMICROELECTR